g450 Upgrade

Installing and Upgrading the Avaya G450 Media Gateway
03-602054 Issue 1 January 2008
2008 Avaya Inc. All Rights Reserved. Notice While reasonable efforts were made to ensure that the information in this document was complete and accurate at the time of printing, Avaya Inc. can assume no liability for any errors. Changes and corrections to the information in this document may be incorporated in future releases. For full legal page information, please see the complete document, Avaya Legal Page for Software Documentation, Document number 03-600758. To locate this document on the website, simply go to http://www.avaya.com/support and search for the document number in the search box. Documentation disclaimer Avaya Inc. is not responsible for any modifications, additions, or deletions to the original published version of this documentation unless such modifications, additions, or deletions were performed by Avaya. Customer and/or End User agree to indemnify and hold harmless Avaya, Avaya's agents, servants and employees against all claims, lawsuits, demands and judgments arising out of, or in connection with, subsequent modifications, additions or deletions to this documentation to the extent made by the Customer or End User. Link disclaimer Avaya Inc. is not responsible for the contents or reliability of any linked Web sites referenced elsewhere within this documentation, and Avaya does not necessarily endorse the products, services, or information described or offered within them. We cannot guarantee that these links will work all of the time and we have no control over the availability of the linked pages. Warranty Avaya Inc. provides a limited warranty on this product. Refer to your sales agreement to establish the terms of the limited warranty. In addition, Avayas standard warranty language, as well as information regarding support for this product, while under warranty, is available through the following Web site: http://www.avaya.com/support Copyright Except where expressly stated otherwise, the Product is protected by copyright and other laws respecting proprietary rights. Unauthorized reproduction, transfer, and or use can be a criminal, as well as a civil, offense under the applicable law. Avaya support Avaya provides a telephone number for you to use to report problems or to ask questions about your product. The support telephone number is 1-800-242-2121 in the United States. For additional support telephone numbers, see the Avaya Web site: http://www.avaya.com/support
Contents
About this book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Downloading this book and updates from the Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Downloading this book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety labels and security alert labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Related resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Within the US. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . International . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trademarks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sending us comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13
13 13 13 15 16 16 16 16 17
Chapter 1: Before you install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Before going to site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing required equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment required for installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment required for mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment required for installing an S8300 Server . . . . . . Equipment required if you are not installing an S8300 Server Obtaining the G450 serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Obtaining RFA access. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking license file and Avaya Communication Manager versions for a Local Survivable Processor (LSP) . . . Downloading a G450 license file to your laptop . . . . . . . . . . Downloading CM license and authentication files to your laptop Running the Automatic Registration Tool (ART) for the RAS IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Obtaining the RAS IP address and password . . . . . . . . . Downloading recent firmware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Obtaining the Electronic Preinstallation Worksheet (EPW). . . . Site requirements . . . . . . . Environmental verification Power verification . . . . . Grounding verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19
19 19 19 19 20 20 20 20 21 21 21 22 22 24 24 24 24 25 25 26 27 27
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Package contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing power supply units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unpacking and checking package contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 2: Installing the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . . . . . . . . . .

Step 1: Mounting the G450 chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting the G450 in a rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
29
29 29
Issue 1 January 2008
Brackets without cable guides . . . . . . . . . . . Brackets with cable guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attaching each mounting bracket to the G450. . . Before mounting the G450 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting the G450 in the rack . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting the G450 on a wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attaching brackets to the G450 for wall mounting Fastening the G450 to the wall . . . . . . . . . . . Placing the G450 on a table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
30 30 31 31 32 32 32 33 33 33 34 34 35 35 37 39 40 40 40 41 41 41 42 43 43 44 45
Step 2: Installing the Power Supply Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Step 3: Installing the media modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . Before inserting media modules into the G450 chassis Combination limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Allocating slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inserting the S8300 Server module . . . . . . . . . . . . Inserting media modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Step 4: Attaching ground conductors General grounding requirements . Installation location . . . . . . Ground conductor . . . . . . . Ground block. . . . . . . . . . Restricted Access Location . . Approved grounds. . . . . . . . . Connecting the safety ground . . Attaching the ground wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step 5: Connecting power to the G450 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PWR LED indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 3: Connecting devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Step 1: Connecting data and voice devices . . . . . . . . . Connecting a switch or a network data port . . . . . . . Connecting a computer to the Services port . . . . Connecting an IP telephone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the telephone to the G450 . . . . . . . . Connecting an ISDN BRI station . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting one ISDN BRI station to one ISDN port . Connecting two ISDN BRI stations to one ISDN port Connecting an analog telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting a DCP telephone to an MM712 or MM717 media module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
47
47 47 48 48 49 49 49 49 50 52
. . . . . . . . . . . .
4 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway
Connecting an analog trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting an E1/T1 trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting an ISDN BRI trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting devices to the MM717 and MM716 media modules Connecting the MM716 or MM717 front panel connector to a punch down block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
53 54 54 55 55 56 57 57 57 58 58 58 58 59 59 59 60
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step 2: Installing circuit protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Step 3: Connecting to the Wide Area Network (WAN) . . . . . . . . . Connecting a WAN to the G450 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting a WAN link to the MM342 media module . . . . . Connecting an E1/T1 WAN link to the MM340 media module. Connecting an Ethernet WAN link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting an external router to the G450 . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step 4: Installing the Coupled Bonding Conductor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the CBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Step 5: Installing the Avaya Partner Contact Closure Adjunct . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the contact closure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Step 6: Installing an 808A Emergency Transfer Panel and associated telephones
Chapter 4: Connecting and enabling a modem for remote access . . .

Connecting and enabling a modem (G450 without S8300) . . . . . Connecting and enabling a serial modem . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting and enabling a USB modem (G450 without S8300) Testing the modem connection (G450 without S8300) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
63
63 63 68 73 74 74 74 77 78 78 79 79
Connecting and enabling a USB modem (G450 with S8300) . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance web pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessing the Maintenance web pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the modem settings on the Configure Server Maintenance Web Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting and enabling a USB modem (G450 with S8300) . . . . . . . . Connecting and enabling the modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing the modem connection (G450 with S8300) . . . . . . . . . . . . . If a USB CD-ROM drive is required to download software upgrades . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 5: Configuring the G450 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 6: After installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Step 1: Testing the installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing data connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
81 83
83 83 83
Testing trunks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LSP failover testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Step 2: Removing the installation equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
83 84 85
Chapter 7: Adding media modules and devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Adding a media module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding voice modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding WAN modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a LAN device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring the LAN device on the G450 . . . . . . . . . . Recording LAN information for software configuration. Testing the LAN device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
87
87 87 87 88 88 88 88 89 89 89 89 89 90 90 90 90 91 91 91 91 91 92 92 92 92 92
Adding a telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring the telephone on the G450 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recording telephone information for software configuration Testing the telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering the trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special considerations when ordering an analog trunk Connecting the trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring the trunk on the G450 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recording trunk information for software configuration Testing the trunk. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a WAN line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering the WAN line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the WAN line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring the WAN line on the G450 . . . . . . . . . . . . Recording WAN information for software configuration Testing the WAN link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding an Avaya Partner Contact Closure Adjunct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 8: Upgrading and replacing Field Replaceable Units . . . . . .

Adding or removing G450 main board modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing and inserting the G450 main board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding or removing VoIP modules: MP20 and MP80 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing the fan tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing a power supply unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
93
93 93 94 96 97
Chapter 9: Upgrading the Avaya Communication Manager software . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Upgrading the software using a CD-ROM drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Local configuration with S8300 Media Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Upgrading the software without a CD-ROM drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remote configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Performing the upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
99
99 99 100 100 100
Chapter 10: Upgrading the G450 firmware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Upgrading G450 firmware using Avaya Software Update Manager . . . . . . . . Upgrading G450 firmware from the primary controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Upgrading G450 firmware using Gateway Installation Wizard (GIW). . . . . . . . Upgrading G450 firmware and Avaya Communication Manager software using Avaya Installation Wizard (IW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Upgrading G450 firmware using the CLI via FTP/TFTP . . . . . . . . . . . . CLI commands for upgrading G450 firmware via FTP/TFTP . . . . . . . Example upgrade via FTP/TFTP using the CLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing installation worksheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Entering values in Server Values worksheet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up a TFTP server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up a TFTP on the LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Downloading G450 firmware files to a local TFTP server . . . . . . . . . Installing firmware from the TFTP server on the S8300 Server. . . . . . Copying firmware files to the /tftpboot directory of an S8300 Server Upgrading G450 firmware using the CLI via a USB device . . . . . CLI Commands for upgrading G450 firmware via a USB device Example upgrade using the CLI via a USB device . . . . . . . Downloading G450 firmware files to a local PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
101
101 102 102 103 104 104 105 105 106 107 107 108 109 110 111 111 111 112
Chapter 11: Upgrading IP phone configuration and firmware files . . .

Administering the upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Upgrading the IP telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TFTP IP telephone upgrade examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Upgrading the 4602SW and 4602D phones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Upgrading 4620 IP phones after the script files are already stored in NVRAM Failure scenarios and repair actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Upgrading considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
113
114 115 116 117 119 120 121
Chapter 12: Backing up and restoring the G450 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 13: Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
One telephone stops working. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Identifying the problem when one phone stops working . . . . . . . . . . . . Several telephones stop working. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Identifying the problem when several phones stop working . . . . . . . . . . No power on the G450 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A trunk stops working . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A WAN line stops working . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLI is not accessible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
123 125
125 125 126 126 126 126 127 127
Appendix A: Front panel description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

The front panel of the Avaya G450 Media Gateway chassis without media modules Media module slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . USB ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Console port (CON) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Services port (SERVICES). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emergency Transfer Relay port (ETR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contact Closure port (CCA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Implement the Contact Closure feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Router ports (ETH WAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switch ports (ETH LAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reset (RST) and Alternate Software Bank (ASB) buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . Load firmware from a bank other than the default bank during startup . . The front panel of the Avaya S8300 Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S8300 Server ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S8300 Server port LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The front panel of the Avaya MM340 media module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MM340 ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MM340 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The front panel of the Avaya MM342 media module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MM342 ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MM342 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The front panel of the Avaya MM710 media module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MM710 ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MM710 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The front panel of the Avaya MM711 media module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
131
131 131 132 132 132 132 133 133 133 133 133 134 134 134 135 135 136 136 136 137 137 137 138 138 138 139
MM711 ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MM711 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The front panel of the Avaya MM712 media module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MM712 ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MM712 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The front panel of the Avaya MM714 media module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MM714 ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MM714 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The front panel of the Avaya MM716 media module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MM716 ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MM716 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The front panel of the Avaya MM717 media module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MM717 ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MM717 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The front panel of the Avaya MM720 media module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MM720 ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MM720 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The front panel of the Avaya MM722 media module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MM722 ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MM722 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
139 140 140 140 141 141 141 142 142 143 144 144 145 146 147 147 147 148 148 148
Appendix B: Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

G450 Media Gateway specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power cord specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
149
149 150
Appendix C: Running the Avaya Installation Wizard (Avaya IW) . . . . .

Accessing Avaya IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preliminary screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MGC configuration and upgrade options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring and upgrading the server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Upgrading an existing MGC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring the primary controller IP addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gateway configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Firmware configuration . . . . . . . Modem configuration . . . . . . Telephony configuration . . . . Trunk configuration . . . . . . . Adding a trunk . . . . . . . . Modifying trunk parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
151
151 153 156 156 160 166 173 177 183 186 190 192 193
Modifying IP route configuration . Displaying trunk status . . . . . . Removing a trunk . . . . . . . . . Configuring a trunk media module Endpoint installation . . . . . . . . . Alarm configuration . . . . . . . . . . Password and final screens. . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
194 195 196 197 197 198 202
Appendix D: Running the Gateway Installation Wizard (GIW) . . . . . .

Running the Gateway Installation Wizard (GIW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Performing a basic configuration of the G450 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connect a modem, if necessary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting a serial modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting a USB modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test the modem connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing the modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
209
209 209 230 230 231 231 231
Appendix E: Power supplies and adjunct systems . . . . . . . . . . . .

Typical adjunct power connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Typical adjunct power connections end-to-end . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auxiliary power for an attendant console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Local and Phantom Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IA770 INTUITY AUDIX messaging application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shared resources of IA 770 coresidency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Where is the IA770 location and software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using an AUDIX trunk group as well as an AUDIX hunt group for new systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IA770 INTUITY AUDIX installations and S8300 upgrades for IA770 INTUITY AUDIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
233
234 235 235 236 237 237 238 238 238 239 239 239 242 242 245 246 247 247 247 248
INTUITY AUDIX LX messaging system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Call center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Avaya G450 announcement software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Uninterruptible power supply (UPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UPS models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal server installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment required for installing and administering the terminal server . What are the distance limits for the terminal server . . . . . . . . . . . . How is the terminal server cabling connected. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the IOLAN+ to the adjunct and the LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . Administering the IOLAN+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the IOLAN+ . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up HyperTerminal on the computer Administering the IOLAN+ the first time . . Rebooting the IOLAN+ . . . . . . . . . . . Navigating the IOLAN+ terminal server . . . . Administering the gateway . . . . . . . . . . . Administering an IOLAN+ port . . . . . . . . . Testing connectivity through the IOLAN+ . . . Potential failure scenarios and repair actions . Administering IP services . . . . . . . . . . . . Call Detail Recording (CDR) . . . . . . Connecting CDR equipment . . . . Administering CDR data collection. Administering CDR parameters. . . Testing the switch-to-adjunct link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
249 249 249 252 252 253 253 255 256 256 258 258 258 259 260 261 261 261 261 262 262 262 263 263 263 264 264 264 265 265 265 267 270 270 274 276 277 278 278
Reliable Data Transport Tool (RDTT) package . What does the RDTT package contain . . . Downloading the RDTT package . . . . . . Installing the RDTT package . . . . . . . . Administering the RDTT package . . . . . Related topics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DS1/T1 CPE loopback jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing a loopback jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting the loopback jack installation method . . . . . . . . . Installing a loopback jack with a smart jack . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing a loopback jack without a smart jack . . . . . . . . . . Administering a loopback jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing a loopback jack with a smart jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing the DS1 span from the MM710 to the loopback jack . . . Checking the integrity of local equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing the integrity of data sent over the loop . . . . . . . . . . Testing the DS1 span from the smart jack to the network interface termination or fiber multiplexer (MUX) Testing the DS1 span from the loopback jack to the smart jack . Testing a loopback jack without a smart jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configurations using fiber multiplexers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking for the presence of DC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External modems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hardware required when configuring modems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11
Multi-Tech MT5634ZBA-USB-V92 . . . . . . . . . Configuring the MT5634ZBA-USB-V92 modem Multi-Tech MT5634ZBA-V92-GLOBAL . . . . . . . Administering Multi-Tech modems . . . . . . . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
278 279 279 279 280 281 281 282 283 284 284 285 285 286 286 287 287 287 287 287 288
Busy tone disconnect equipment for non-U.S. installations . . . . . . . . . . . . Music-on-hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing a non-FCC-registered music source on a G450 Media Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting a non-FCC-registered music-on-hold source to a G450 using a KS-23395-L3 coupler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting a non-FCC-registered music-on-hold source to a G450 using a KS-23395-L4 coupler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing an FCC-registered music source on a G450 Media Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting an FCC-registered music-on-hold source to a G450 using a KS-23395-L4 coupler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paging and announcement equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hooking up loudspeaker paging from a G450 Media Gateway . . . . . . . . . Adjunct Information Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Call Management System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INTUITY AUDIX Messaging Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . Avaya Modular Messaging System . . . . . . . . . . . . . Avaya Interactive Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Avaya EC500 Extension to Cellular and Off-PBX Stations Avaya SIP Enablement Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Call Accounting Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Appendix F: Information Checklists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installer's Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Serial Number and Login Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G450 Serial Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Logins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quick Setup for G450 Media Gateway Processor (MGP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation Site Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
289
290 291 291 291 292 293
Appendix G: Equipment List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
295 305
About this book
Downloading this book and updates from the Web

You can download the latest version of Installing and Upgrading the Avaya G450 Media Gateway from the Avaya Support website. You must have access to the Internet, and a copy of Acrobat Reader must be installed on your personal computer. Avaya makes every effort to ensure that the information in this book is complete and accurate. However, information can change after we publish this book. Therefore, the Avaya Support website might also contain new product information and updates to the information in this book. You can also download these updates from the Avaya Support website.
Downloading this book

1. Access the Avaya Support website at http://www.avaya.com/support/. 2. Click FIND DOCUMENTATION and TECHNICAL INFORMATION by PRODUCT NAME. 3. Type this books document number (03-602054) in the Search box. 4. Click GO. The search results appear. 5. Locate the latest version of the book. 6. Click the book title. Your browser downloads the book.
Safety labels and security alert labels

Observe all caution, warning, and danger statements to help prevent loss of service, equipment damage, personal injury, and security problems. This book uses the following safety labels and security alert labels:
! CAUTION:
CAUTION:
A caution statement calls attention to a situation that can result in harm to software, loss of data, or an interruption in service.
13
About this book
!
WARNING:
WARNING: A warning statement calls attention to a situation that can result in harm to hardware or equipment. A warning can also indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause personal injury if the hazard is not avoided by following the instructions provided.
! DANGER:
DANGER:
A danger statement indicates the presence of a hazard that can result in severe personal injury or death if the hazard is not avoided by following the instructions provided. ELECTROSTATIC ALERT:
ELECTROSTATIC ALERT:
An ESD warning calls attention to situations that can result in ESD damage to electronic components.
!
SECURITY ALERT:
SECURITY ALERT: A security alert calls attention to a situation that can increase the potential for unauthorized use of a telecommunications system.
Related resources
Related resources
For more information on the Avaya G450 Media Gateway and related features, see the following books: Title Overview for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway Quick Start for Hardware Installation for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway Administration for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway Avaya G450 CLI Reference Maintenance Alarms for Avaya Communication Manager, Media Gateways and Servers Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager, Media Gateways and Servers Maintenance Procedures for Avaya Communication Manager, Media Gateways and Servers Number 03-602058 03-602053 03-602055 03-602056 03-300430 03-300431 03-300432
15
About this book
Technical assistance
Avaya provides resources for technical assistance within the US and internationally.
Within the US
Call the Avaya Technical Consulting Support System at 1-800-225-7585 for help with feature administration and system applications. Call the Avaya National Customer Care Support Line at 1-800-242-2121 for help with maintenance and repair. Call Avaya Toll Fraud Intervention at 1-800-643-2353 for help with toll fraud.
International
Contact your local Avaya authorized dealer for all international resources.
Trademarks
All trademarks identified by or are registered trademarks or trademarks, respectively, of Avaya Inc. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Sending us comments
Sending us comments
Avaya welcomes your comments about this book. To reach us by:
Mail, send your comments to: Avaya Inc. Product Documentation Group Room B3-H13 1300 W. 120th Ave. Westminster, CO 80234 USA
Email, send your comments to: document@avaya.com
Fax, send your comments to: 1-303-538-1741
Ensure that you mention the name and number of this book, Installing and Upgrading the Avaya G450 Media Gateway, 03-602054.
17
About this book
Chapter 1: Before you install

Read this chapter carefully before you begin the installation. If you are installing the G450 at a customer site, read this chapter before going to the customer site.
Before going to site

Before going to the site, it is necessary to read the planning documentation and prepare equipment required for installation.
Preparing required equipment

Make sure you have the necessary equipment to assist you in the installation before you start working.
Equipment required for installation

One loop start analog trunk for connecting a modem A separate telephone line, if needed, for verbal communication during remote configuration
Equipment required for mounting

A crosspoint screwdriver if rack mounting or wall mounting the G450 If you will mount the G450 on a flat wall: screws to fasten the G450 to the wall If you will mount the G450 on a non-flat wall: - A plywood sheet at least in (1.2 cm) thick and at least 2 x 2 ft (0.6 x 0.6 m) in size - Wood screws to fasten the G450 to the plywood - Screws to fasten the plywood board to the wall
19
Before you install
Equipment required for installing an S8300 Server
One USB modem. The only supported USB modem is the Multitech MultiModemUSB MT5634ZBA-USB-V92. One USB CD-ROM drive A laptop computer with MS Internet Explorer
Equipment required if you are not installing an S8300 Server

A PC on the local network, optionally with a USB flash drive A laptop computer running Windows XP or Windows 2000 with a serial port recognized by the operating system on the laptop. If the port is recognized, it is listed by the Device Manager. A modem to connect to the G450 to enable dial-in configuration. The G450 supports the Multitech MultiModemZBA MT5634ZBA-V-V92 serial modem and the Multitech MultiModemUSB MT5634ZBA-USB-V92 USB modem.
Obtaining the G450 serial number

Look for the serial number sticker on the back of the G450 chassis, to create the customers license file. If the unit is delivered directly to the customer and you will not have phone or LAN line access from the customer site to access the http://rfa.avaya.com website, this task will require a preliminary trip to the customer site.
Obtaining RFA access

You need to obtain a personal Single Sign-On (SSO) for Remote Feature Activation (RFA) website authentication login before going to the site for installation. You must complete the authentication process before you can be assigned an SSO authentication login. As a first-time user:
Business Partners should point their browsers to the Business Partner portal option sales_market, services-voice, training tools and procedures to select RFA Associates should point their browsers to the Avaya Associate portal Contractors should point their browsers to Avaya.com Alternatively go directly to http://rfa.avaya.com.
From that point, log into SSO and complete the process to obtain your personal login.
Checking license file and Avaya Communication Manager versions for a Local Survivable Processor (LSP)
If you are installing an S8300 as a Local Survivable Processor (LSP), the license file for the S8300 must have a feature set that is equal to or greater than that of the server that acts as primary controller (an S8300, S8400, S87xx, or S85xx). This is necessary so that if control passes to the LSP, it can allow the same level of call processing as that of the primary controller. Additionally, the LSP must have a version of Avaya Communication Manager (CM) that is identical to that of the primary controller. The license file requirements of the LSP should be identified in your planning documentation.
Downloading a G450 license file to your laptop

If you are installing VPN, obtain a VPN license file from the Remote Feature Activation (RFA). 1. Use Windows File Explorer or another file management program to create a directory on your laptop for storing license files (for example, C:\licenses). 2. Access the Internet from your laptop and go to http://rfa.avaya.com. 3. Login using your SSO login and password. The AFS and RFA information home page appears. 4. Start the RFA application from the RFA information page. To create and download the license file, follow the instructions outlined in the Avaya Remote Feature Activation (RFA) User Guide, 03-300149. Once the G450 license file is downloaded to your PC, you can use either the Avaya Installation Wizard or the Gateway Installation Wizard to install the license file in the G450. See Running the Avaya Installation Wizard (Avaya IW) and Running the Gateway Installation Wizard (GIW).
Downloading CM license and authentication files to your laptop

If you are installing a G450 with an S8300 Server as a primary controller, you need license and authentication files for the Communication Manager. 1. Use Windows File Explorer or another file management program to create a directory on your laptop for storing license and authentication files (for example, C:\licenses). 2. Access the Internet from your laptop and go to http://rfa.avaya.com. 3. Login using your SSO login and password. The AFS and RFA information home page appears.
21
Before you install
4. Start the RFA application from the RFA information page. To create and download the license file and authentication file, follow the instructions outlined in the Avaya Remote Feature Activation (RFA) User Guide, 03-300149. 5. Use the download or email capabilities of the RFA website to download the license and authentication files to your laptop. Once the Communication Manager license and authentication files are downloaded to your PC, you can use the Avaya Installation Wizard to install them (see Running the Avaya Installation Wizard (Avaya IW). You can also use the Maintenance Web Interface to install the Communication Manager license and authentication files.
Running the Automatic Registration Tool (ART) for the RAS IP address
The ART tool is a software tool that generates a remote access (RAS) IP address and password, for accessing a product attached to a customers modem. This IP address is required for configuring remote access to a modem on the S8300 or G450. If you need to configure remote access to both the G450 and the S8300, follow this procedure twice, once for the G450 and once for the S8300. For each procedure, a script file is created and downloaded or emailed to you. You can use the installation script to automatically set up an IP address and other alarming parameters. When you run GIW, you will have the opportunity to import the Electronic Planning Worksheet (EPW). The ART information will be imported along with all the other information in the EPW. Alternatively, if the G450 will be configured using the CLI, keep the installation script to run as a CLI command at the configuration stage. If the G450 will be configured using Gateway Installation Wizard (GIW) or Avaya Installation Wizard (AIW), and you have an EPW, enter the ART information contained in the installation script into the EPW. Note: ART is available only to Avaya associates. Business Partners call 800-295-0099. Note: You must generate a license file, and for the S8300 also an authentication file, before you use the ART tool. In addition, the ART process is available only to Avaya personnel. You need an ART user name and password, which you can set up at the ART website. Non-Avaya personnel must contact their service support or customer care center for INADS addresses, if required.
Note:
Note:
Obtaining the RAS IP address and password

1. Access the ART website on your laptop at http://art.dr.avaya.com.
2. From the User menu, select Administer an S8xxx, G450, CCS, CVLAN, or ASG Guard II. The Enter Network Password dialog box appears. 3. Enter your ART user name and password. 4. Click OK. The Start of Installation script & IP Addr Admin screen appears. 5. In the FL Number field, enter the customers FL number. 6. In the Session Type field, select Installation Script Administration. 7. In the Product Type field, select G450 MEDIA GATEWAY if you want to configure remote access for the G450, or S8300 SERVER if you want to configure remote access for the S8300. 8. In the INADS field, enter the number of the telephone line to which you will connect the modem. 9. Click Start Installation script & IP Addr Admin. ART validates your input and the Customer Validation screen appears. 10. Read the customer information displayed, to check that it is correct. 11. In the Customer Type field, select Other. 12. Click Continue Installation Script Administration. A product list appears. 13. Click the number of the product for which you are configuring remote access. The G450 MEDIA GATEWAY Installation Script Administration Data screen appears. 14. In the Product Name field, enter the product name. 15. In the INADS Number field, make sure the correct customer provided dial-in number for the G450 Media Gateway appears. 16. Click Continue Installation Script Administration. ART generates the RAS IP address and password (CHAP secret key) and generates an installation script for the product. Keep the RAS IP address and password to configure your modem later. 17. Click Download Installation Script File to download the installation script to your laptop, or Email Installation Script File to have the script emailed to you. A script file is created and downloaded or emailed to you.
23
Before you install
Downloading recent firmware

Download any recently updated firmware for the G450 and media modules to your laptop. Visit the Avaya Support website to check the latest firmware image file versions against the factory installed versions in the hardware you are installing. Download any firmware image file upgrades you need from the Avaya Support website, and any Communication Manager service packs that may be required for the upgrade.
Obtaining the Electronic Preinstallation Worksheet (EPW)

The EPW is an Excel spreadsheet from which Avaya configuration wizards automatically pull data to configure and install the S8300 Server and the G450 Media Gateway. The EPW is filled in by the customer and project manager, and should be completed before installation. For greatest efficiency, obtain the Electronic Preinstallation Worksheet (EPW) from the Avaya Support website at http://support.avaya.com/avayaiw.
Site requirements
Inspect the site before you begin the installation. Verify that the site requirements have been met for adequate environmental conditions, power and grounding availability, safety, and security conditions. If you find discrepancies between the specifications necessary for proper installation of equipment and the conditions on site, contact your project manager before proceeding with the installation. The G450 may be installed in a 19 rack, mounted on a wall, or placed on a sturdy table. Installation instructions are provided in Chapter 2: Installing the Avaya G450 Media Gateway. The surrounding temperature should be in the range 0-40C. The humidity should not be higher than 90%.
Environmental verification
Verify that temperatures and clearances are within the recommended technical parameters. Consult the table of Technical Specifications in Appendix B: Technical specifications.
Site requirements
!
WARNING:
WARNING: Verify that temperature and clearance ranges are within tolerable limits. The thermal sensors may shut down equipment if it is subjected to conditions beyond the recommended limits. Equipment can be damaged if these restrictions are not respected.
Power verification
Check that an adequate number of power outlets are available. Verify that the G450 Media Gateway and the other equipment in the rack do not present a possible overcurrent or overload to the customer's branch circuit and/or power distribution strip. Power requirements are listed in Power cord specifications on page 150.
!
WARNING:
WARNING: Do not overload the power circuit.
Grounding verification
Ensure that the installation site has access to approved grounds and that either a trained technician or a licensed electrician will be verifying all grounds and installing the Supplementary Ground Conductor (consult Step 4: Attaching ground conductors).
25
Before you install
!
WARNING:
WARNING: Installation in a Restricted Access Location and secure access are required in Finland, Norway, and Sweden. The G450 Media Gateway relies on two ground connections: first, the mains plugs for the power supplies are required to be connected to AC outlets that have earth contacts; and second, the Supplementary Ground Conductor provided with the system provides a non-removable ground even when the AC cords are disconnected. However, because of unreliable earthing concerns in Finland, Norway, and Sweden, the G450 Media Gateway must be installed in a Restricted Access Location (RAL). An RAL is defined as an access that can be gained only by trained service personnel or customers who have been instructed about the reasons for the restricted access and any safety precautions that must be taken. In these cases, access to the G450 Media Gateway is gained by the use of a tool (such as a lock and key) or other means of security. If you have any questions about the safety conditions, contact your project manager. When you have verified that the site is ready for a safe installation, proceed with the installation.
Package contents
The G450 chassis and accessories are shipped in a box. The package should contain the following items:

One Avaya G450 Media Gateway chassis. The required media modules may be installed. One accessories box, containing: - One power cord. If the power cord provided does not have the correct plug configuration needed in a particular country, see the power cord specifications in Appendix B: Technical specifications. - Two standard mounting brackets - One mounting bracket with cable guides - One Supplementary Ground Conductor - Fifteen 3/8 flat head screws - One 5/16 crosspoint screw for grounding - One washer for grounding - Four rubber feet - One jumper for bridging NVRAM init pins
The Avaya Partner Contact Closure adjunct box, if ordered, is packaged separately.
Package contents
Removing power supply units

For ease of installation and to enable single-person installation, it is recommended to remove the power supply unit(s) before unpacking the G450. 1. Open the package. Note that the G450 is lying flat. Turn it so that the rear panel is facing up. 2. Remove the power supply unit (PSU). If you ordered two PSUs, remove them both. a. Loosen the two PSU captive screws, one on each side of the PSU. b. Grasp the two side handles and pull the PSU up and out. c. Place the PSU carefully on the table.
Unpacking and checking package contents

1. Unpack the G450 and accessories. ELECTROSTATIC ALERT: Wear an anti-static wrist ground strap whenever handling components of an Avaya G450 Media Gateway. Connect the strap to an approved ground, such as an unpainted metal surface.
2. Check the contents of the packaging against the customer order. 3. Cross-check the customer order with the planning documentation you have been given. Media modules, telephones and other equipment are listed on your planning and shipping documentation. Placement for the media modules and other equipment are also indicated. 4. Verify that all necessary elements have been received and are in good condition. If there are missing or damaged elements, contact your project manager. The planning documentation will list contact information for key personnel. If you have any questions about the equipment order, or if the equipment has been damaged, contact your project manager.
27
Before you install
Chapter 2: Installing the Avaya G450 Media Gateway

Installing the Avaya G450 Media Gateway consists of installing the chassis, power supply, and media modules, attaching ground conductors, and connecting the power.
Step 1: Mounting the G450 chassis

You can mount the G450 in a rack, on a wall, or on a table. ELECTROSTATIC ALERT: When handling any components of an S8300 Server or G450 Media Gateway, wear an anti-static wrist ground strap. Connect the strap to an approved ground, such as an unpainted metal surface. Note: Avaya has developed special hardware platforms for customers with harsh environmental conditions. These platforms have been tested to meet stringent physical and environmental requirements (i.e., shock, vibration, EMI, etc.) imposed by the United States Navy for use on their ships. The platforms make use of specialized racks and reinforcements. If you wish to obtain information about the design and implementation of such a ruggedized solution, contact the Avaya Navy Shipboard Services organization.
Note:
Mounting the G450 in a rack

The G450 mounts in a standard 19-inch rack. You can fasten the G450 to the rack either at the front of the G450 or at the middle. In either case, mounting brackets must be attached to the G450. There are two types of mounting brackets provided with the G450:

Without cable guides. Two mounting brackets without cable guides are provided. With cable guides. One mounting bracket with cable guides is provided. This bracket provides guides for electrical cables and is useful for cable management.
29
Installing the Avaya G450 Media Gateway
Brackets without cable guides

Mounting brackets without cable guides can be attached in either of the following positions:

To each side of the front of the G450 for fastening the unit to the rack at the front To the middle of each side panel of the G450 for fastening the chassis to the rack at the middle
Figure 1: Attaching a mounting bracket to the front of the G450
Figure 2: Attaching a mounting bracket to the middle of the G450
Brackets with cable guides

You can attach the mounting bracket with cable guides to the front of the G450 at one side, as shown in the following figure. If you are fastening the chassis to the rack at the front, use the mounting bracket with cable guides as one of the two front brackets. If you are fastening the chassis to the rack at the middle, use the mounting bracket with cable guides at the front of the chassis, in addition to the two regular mounting brackets on the sides of the chassis. In this case, the mounting bracket with cable guides serves for cable management only you do not fasten it to the rack.
Step 1: Mounting the G450 chassis
Note:
Note: It is recommended to attach the mounting bracket with cable guides to the left side of the rack, so that the cables will not interfere in case you replace the fan tray. However, if you are installing an MM717 or MM716 media module, attach the mounting bracket with cable guides to the right side of the rack, to support the weight of the amphenol cable you will connect to the MM717 media module. See Connecting a DCP telephone to an MM712 or MM717 media module on page 52.
Figure 3: Attaching a mounting bracket with cable guides
Attaching each mounting bracket to the G450

The G450 is held in place by mounting screws through the two mounting ears. Fill racks from the bottom; that is, mount units in the lower positions first, to avoid balancing problems and cabling complications. 1. Position a bracket over the desired mounting position. 2. Affix the bracket to the chassis with five of the fifteen 6-32 x 3/8 screws provided. 3. Tighten with a screwdriver.
Before mounting the G450
Ensure that the rack is bolted to the floor and is earthquake-protected, if required. If the rack is not securely fixed in place, do not proceed with the installation. If the G450 is being mounted in a rack with other equipment already installed, the G450 must be positioned to avoid imbalance. Note: The G450 weighs 21 pounds (9.5 kg) empty and between 37.5 and 39.5 pounds (between 17 and 18 kg) when equipped with media modules, an S8300 Server, and two Power Supply Units.
Note:
31
Mounting the G450 in the rack

The G450 is designed for single-person mounting. This assumes that the power supplies were removed (see Removing power supply units on page 27). 1. Insert two mounting screws, one on either side of the rack. These will be the bottom screws of the mounting brackets. Turn the screws only 3-4 times, so that a part of them is protruding. 2. Position the G450 in the rack so that the bottoms of the brackets are resting on the protruding screws. 3. Position the G450 in the rack. Ensure that there is adequate ventilation. 4. Insert four rack mounting screws, two on each side. 5. Tighten the rack mounting screws. Avoid overtightening. 6. Either tighten the two bottom-most screws inserted in step 1, or remove them completely. 7. Verify that ventilation vents are not obstructed. At this point, you have mounted the G450 chassis in the rack and are ready to insert media modules as required in the planning documentation.
Mounting the G450 on a wall

To mount the G450 on a wall, use the two mounting brackets without cable guides. You can also add a mounting bracket with cable guides if desired, as explained in Brackets with cable guides on page 30.
!
WARNING:
WARNING: Only service-trained personnel are to wall-mount the G450.
! CAUTION:
CAUTION:
A fully loaded G450 weighs 40 pounds (18 kg). It weighs 30 pounds (13.4 kg) if both power supply units were removed. Use lifting precautions. A minimum of two installers is required to wall-mount a G450.
Attaching brackets to the G450 for wall mounting

Attach a bracket to each side of the G450, as shown in the figure below.
Step 2: Installing the Power Supply Units
Figure 4: Attaching a bracket to each side of the G450
Fastening the G450 to the wall

The plywood and the hardware to mount the plywood are installer-provided. 1. If the wall does not have a portion of plywood available, mount a plywood sheet at least in (1.2 cm) thick and at least 2 x 2 ft (0.6 x 0.6 m) in size, horizontally onto the wall. Make sure the plywood screws are sufficiently anchored in the wall. Use a minimum of four wood screws and ensure the screws are driven into wall studs, or use four wall anchors rated not less than 50 pounds (22.5 kg) shear strength each. 2. Mark the plywood with the location of the G450 bracket screw holes before fastening the plywood to the wall. 3. Position the G450 so that its front panel is facing up, and secure it to the plywood using a minimum of four screws (pan head at least in, # 10-12 screw).
Placing the G450 on a table

If you will be installing the G450 as a tabletop unit, you need to affix the provided rubber feet to the underside of the G450. 1. Remove the four feet from their packaging. 2. Turn the G450 upside down. 3. Position each foot into one of the mounting sites, near each corner of the chassis.
Step 2: Installing the Power Supply Units

When the G450 chassis is installed, first insert the power supply unit(s) if you removed them before installation (refer to Removing power supply units on page 27).
33
1. Position the power supply unit before the opening at the rear of the G450 and engage both sides of the PSU in the interior guides. 2. Slide the PSU slowly into the chassis, maintaining an even pressure to assure that the PSU does not become twisted or disengaged from the guides. 3. Close and tighten the two PSU captive screws, one on each side of the PSU. Figure 5: Inserting the power supply unit
Step 3: Installing the media modules

When the G450 chassis is installed and the power supply unit(s) have been inserted, you can insert the media modules. Each module is shipped with two thumb screws for securing the position of the module in the G450 chassis. Note: The required media modules are sometimes pre-installed in the G450 chassis. If this is the case, skip this step. Read this section only if the media modules are not pre-installed, or if you want to replace modules or add new media modules.
Note:
Before inserting media modules into the G450 chassis
Do not install an unsupported combination of media modules. See Combination limitations on page 35. Allocate a permissible slot to each media module. See Allocating slots on page 35.
!
WARNING:
WARNING: The Avaya G450 Media Gateway must not be operated with any open slots. Failure to cover empty slots with the supplied blank plates can cause overheating due to inadequate air distribution.
Combination limitations
The following limitations apply to combining media modules in the G450:

3 MM340/MM342 WAN modules The MM760 is not supported
Allocating slots
You insert media modules into the slots marked V1, V2, V3, V4, V5, V6, V7, and V8 on the G450 front panel, shown in Figure 6 below. Allocate a slot for the media module. Make sure your slot allocations allow a permissible slot for every media module.
35
Figure 6: The G450 front panel ports and slots

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Figure notes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. System LEDs USB ports Console port Services port ETR (Emergency Transfer Relay) port CCA (Contact Closure) port ETH WAN ports ETH LAN ports RST button ASB button 11. V1 slot for standard media module or S8300 Server 12. V2 slot for standard media module 13. V3 slot for standard media module 14. V4 slot for standard media module 15. V5 slot for standard media module 16. V6 slot for standard media module 17. V7 slot for standard media module 18. V8 slot for standard media module
Table 1: Permitted slots for media modules Media module MM340 MM342 MM710 MM711 MM712 MM714 Permitted slots V3, V4, V8 V3, V4, V8 V1 V8 V1 V8 V1 V8 V1 V8 Description Provides one E1/T1 WAN port for connecting to a WAN endpoint device. Provides one USP WAN port for connecting to a WAN endpoint device. Provides one E1/T1 trunk port for connecting an E1/T1 telephone trunk. Provides eight universal analog ports for connecting analog telephones or trunks. Provides eight ports for connecting DCP telephones. Provides four analog ports for analog telephones and four analog ports for analog trunks. 1 of 2
Table 1: Permitted slots for media modules (continued) Media module MM716 MM717 Permitted slots V1 V8 V1 V8 Description Provides one amphenol connector that connects to a punch down block to provide 24 analog line ports. Provides one amphenol connector that connects to a punch down block to provide 24 ports for connecting DCP telephones. Provides eight ports for connecting up to eight ISDN trunks or 16 ISDN BRI stations. Provides two ports for connecting ISDN trunks. Server 2 of 2
MM720 MM722 S8300B/S8300C
V1 V8 V1 V8 V1
Inserting the S8300 Server module

The S8300 can only be inserted in slot V1 on the left side of the G450 Media Gateway. ELECTROSTATIC ALERT: Hold media modules only by the edges to avoid damage from static electricity. Do not touch the top or bottom of the circuit board. If possible, wear an anti-static wrist-strap and use an anti-static bag.
! CAUTION:
CAUTION:
The connector pins can be bent or damaged if the module is handled roughly, or if misaligned and then forced into position.
! CAUTION:
CAUTION:
Separate ESD paths to the chassis ground connect to the media modules at the spring-loaded captive screws. Use a screwdriver to ensure the captive screws are securely tightened to prevent damage to the equipment. 1. If you are inserting an S8300/B module, remove the plate above slot V1, labelled Remove before removing or inserting S8300 module. 2. Remove the blank plate from slot V1. 3. Position the media module before the V1 bay opening and engage both sides of the module in the interior guides. 4. Slide the S8300 module slowly into the chassis, maintaining an even pressure to assure that the module does not become twisted or disengaged from the guides.
37
Figure 7: Inserting the S8300 Server module.
5. Apply firm pressure to engage the connectors. The connector has different length pins. The long pins will engage first to provide grounding. Medium length and short pins will provide power and signal. 6. Lock the S8300 Server module into the chassis by tightening the spring-loaded captive screws on the front of the module. 7. If you are inserting an S8300/B module, replace the plate labelled Remove before removing or inserting S8300 module above slot V1 and tighten the screws on the front of the plate. After you have inserted the S8300 Server module, if applicable, insert the rest of the media modules. Make sure to insert each module in a permissible slot.
! DANGER:
DANGER:
To prevent access to electrical hazards by unauthorized personnel and to ensure continued compliance to radiated emissions requirements, all captive screws must be securely tightened such that they cannot be loosened without the use of a tool.
Inserting media modules

After you have inserted the S8300 Server module, if applicable, insert the rest of the media modules. Make sure to insert each module in a permissible slot. Remove the blank plate from the empty bay. ELECTROSTATIC ALERT: Hold media modules only by the edges to avoid damage from static electricity. Do not touch the top or bottom of the circuit board. If possible, wear a wrist-strap and use an anti-static bag.
! CAUTION:
CAUTION:
! CAUTION:
CAUTION:
Separate ESD paths to the chassis ground connect to the media modules at the spring-loaded captive screws. Use a screwdriver to ensure the captive screws are securely tightened to prevent damage to the equipment. 1. Position the media module before the selected bay on the front of the G450 chassis and engage both sides of the module in the interior guides. 2. Slide the module slowly into the chassis, maintaining an even pressure to assure that the module does not become twisted or disengaged from the guides.
Figure 8: Inserting a media module
3. Apply firm pressure to engage the connectors. The media module connector has different length pins. The long pins will engage first to provide grounding. Medium length and short pins will provide power and signal.
39
4. Lock the media module into the chassis by tightening the spring-loaded captive screws on the front of the module.
! DANGER:
DANGER:
To prevent access to electrical hazards by unauthorized personnel and to ensure continued compliance to international radiated emissions requirements, all captive screws must be securely tightened such that they cannot be loosened without the use of a tool.
!
WARNING:
WARNING: After you have connected telephones to the various media modules, be sure to add circuit protection to the lines.
Step 4: Attaching ground conductors

To assure safe installation and operation, carefully read all requirements, recommendations, and instructions. Pay special attention to all CAUTION, WARNING, and DANGER statements.
!
WARNING:
WARNING: System grounding must comply with the general rules for grounding provided in Article 250 of the National Electrical Code (NEC), National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA) 70, or the applicable electrical code in the country of installation.
General grounding requirements

Two safety grounds are required to ensure safe operation of the G450 Media Gateway: the ground conductor that is part of the AC power cord and the field-installed green/yellow conductor referred to as the Supplementary Ground Conductor. Both safety grounds must be connected to an approved ground. If a power cord accompanies the G450, use that cord whenever possible.
Installation location
The customer must select a location for the G450 Media Gateway installation that is no more than 50 ft (15 m) from an approved ground. If this location requirement is not met, the customer must contact a licensed electrician to install a Supplementary Ground Conductor per Article 250
of the National Electrical Code (NEC).
!
WARNING:
WARNING: If the installation location is greater than 50 ft (15 m) from an approved ground, do not install the Avaya G450 Media Gateway until a licensed electrician is present to install a Supplementary Ground Conductor.
Ground conductor
A Supplementary Ground Conductor is provided with the equipment, and is constructed of 10 AWG (4.0 mm2) wire, with an insulated ring terminal crimped to one end that is suitable for the #8 (M4) stud/screw on the rear of the G450 chassis. The customer will need to provide a means of connecting this Supplementary Ground Conductor to an approved ground according to Article 250 of the National Electrical Code (NEC).
Ground block
A ground block is available for use when multiple G450 Media Gateways are being installed. The ground block, intended for rack mounting, has ten terminals available for terminating Supplementary Ground Conductors. Up to ten G450 Media Gateways can be grounded at the block installed close to the equipment (on a rack) and then a single ground conductor can be routed from the same block to an approved ground. If the ground block is to be used, it must be ordered separately.
! DANGER:
DANGER:
Failure to install both grounds will void the Product Safety certifications (UL and the CE Mark) on the product, as well as allow a hazard to be present that could result in death or severe personal injury.
Restricted Access Location

In Finland, Norway, and Sweden, the G450 Media Gateway must be installed in a Restricted Access Location, due to unreliable earthing concerns. A Restricted Access Location is defined as access that can be gained by only Service Personnel or Customers who have been instructed about the reasons for the restricted access and any safety precautions that must be taken. In these cases, access to the G450 is gained by the use of a tool (such as a lock and key) or other means of security.
41
!
WARNING:
WARNING: For installations in Finland, Norway, and Sweden, the Avaya G450 Media Gateway relies on two ground connections (mains plug with an earth contact and a Supplementary Ground Conductor).
Approved grounds
An approved ground is the closest acceptable medium for grounding the building entrance protector, entrance cable shield, or a single-point ground of electronic telephony equipment. If more than one type of approved ground is available on the premises, the grounds must be bonded together as required in Section 250-81 of the NEC for the US or per the local electrical code regulations in the country of installation.
Grounded Building Steel. The metal frame of the building where it is effectively grounded by one of the following grounds: acceptable metallic water pipe, concrete encased ground, or a ground ring. Acceptable Water Pipe. A metal underground water pipe, at least 1/2 in (1.3 cm) in diameter, in direct contact with the earth for at least 10 ft (3m). The pipe must be electrically continuous (or made electrically continuous by bonding around insulated joints, plastic pipe, or plastic water meters) to the point where the protector ground wire connects. A metallic underground water pipe must be supplemented by the metal frame of the building, a concrete-encased ground, or a ground ring. If these grounds are not available, the water pipe ground can be supplemented by one of the following types of grounds: - Other local metal underground systems or structures, such as tanks and piping systems. - Rod and pipe electrodes. A 5/8 in (1.6 cm) solid rod or 3/4 in (2 cm) conduit or pipe electrode driven to a minimum depth of 8 ft (2.4 m). - Plate electrodes. Must have a minimum of 2 sq. ft (0.185 sq. m) of metallic surface exposed to the exterior soil.
Concrete Encased Ground. An electrode encased by at least 2 in (5.1 cm) of concrete and located within and near the bottom of a concrete foundation or footing in direct contact with the earth. The electrode must be at least 20 ft (6.1 m) of one or more steel reinforcing bars or rods, 1/2 in (1.3 cm) in diameter, or at least 20 ft (6.1 m) of bare solid copper, 4 AWG (26 mm2) wire. Ground Ring. A buried ground that encircles a building or structure at a depth of at least 2.5 ft (0.76 m) below the earths surface. The ground ring must be at least 20 ft (6.1 m) of 2 AWG (35 mm2), bare copper wire. Approved Floor Grounds. Floor grounds are those grounds on each floor of a high-rise building that are suitable for connection to the ground terminal in the riser closet and to the cabinet single-point ground terminal. Approved floor grounds may include the following: - Building steel.
- The grounding conductor for the secondary side of the power transformer feeding the floor. - Metallic water pipes. - Power-feed metallic conduit supplying panel boards on the floor. - A grounding point specifically provided in the building for that purpose.
!
WARNING:
WARNING: If the approved ground or approved floor ground can only be accessed inside a dedicated power equipment room, then connections to this ground must be made by a licensed electrician.
Connecting the safety ground

Proper grounding of the G450 Media Gateway installation safeguards the system, users, and service personnel by providing protection from lightning, power surges, AC mains faults, power crosses on central office trunks, and electrostatic discharge (ESD). Local electrical installation codes must be followed when installing the G450.
! DANGER:
DANGER:
Connection of both grounds (through the AC Power Cord and the Supplementary Ground Conductor) is required for safe operation of the G450 Media Gateway.
!
WARNING:
WARNING: An improper ground can cause electrical shock as well as equipment failures and service outages.
Attaching the ground wires

1. Place the ring terminal of the 10 AWG (4.0 mm2) Supplementary Ground Conductor on the ground screw that was provided in the accessories box. 2. Insert the ground screw on the rear of the chassis adjacent to the ground symbol and securely tighten the screw such that it cannot be loosened without the use of a tool.
If the ground block has been purchased

1. Cut the Supplementary Ground Conductor (which has one end attached to the grounding screw on the chassis) to the length needed to terminate it into one of the terminals of the ground block. Do not coil the Supplementary Ground Conductor. 2. Attach one end of the remaining 10 AWG (4 mm2) ground wire to one of the terminals in the ground block and the other end to an approved ground.
43
3. Cut this ground wire to the length needed to reach the approved ground. Do not coil this wire. Note: The ground block is provided for use with more than one G450 in the rack. It is usually mounted by the customer electrician.
Note:
If the ground block is not being used

1. Attach the Supplementary Ground Conductor to an approved ground. 2. Connect the AC power cable to the inlet receptacle on the rear of the chassis.
Step 5: Connecting power to the G450

After you have mounted the G450, installed the PSU(s), installed the media modules, and attached grounding conductors, you can connect power to the G450. The G450 can be ordered with either one or two power supply units. 1. Connect the power cable to the power connector on the G450 back panel. 2. Plug the power cable into a mains socket. The G450 is now powered. The PWR LED on the front panel lights. The CPU LED lights up if the firmware is running. At least one LED on each media module, except the S8300, lights up initially and then goes off after about 20 seconds. 3. If you have a second power supply unit, you can connect it to power by repeating steps 1 and 2. Note: If two PSUs are installed in the G450, the PWR LED blinks if only one PSU is connected to power, and stays on if both PSUs are connected to power.
Note:
Step 5: Connecting power to the G450
PWR LED indications

The PWR LED on the power supply unit indicates the operational status of the power supply unit. Table 2: Power Supply Unit PWR LED LED PWR Name Power State On On Off Color Green Red Indication Power is OK A power fault The PSU unit is broken or not powered
45
Chapter 3: Connecting devices

External endpoint devices can be connected to the ports on the front panels of the installed media modules and to the fixed front panel ports. Before you connect endpoint devices, the G450 should be mounted and all media modules should be inserted.
!
WARNING:
WARNING: To reduce the risk of fire, use only 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cords when installing telephones or adjuncts, or connecting to any media module telecommunication ports. WARNING: Attention: Pour rduire les risques dincendie, utiliser uniquement des conductors de tlcommmunications 26 AWG ou de section suprieure. Pour rduire les risques d'incendie, veuillez n'utiliser que des fils de lignes tlcommmunications de 26 AWG ou de section suprieure, lorsque vous connectez des tlphones, des quipements complmentaires, ou pour toute connexion aux ports tlcommunications d'une quelconque carte d'quipement.
!
WARNING:
Step 1: Connecting data and voice devices

There are various possible ways of connecting different devices. See your planning documentation for any topology requirements to connect specific devices to specific ports. As you connect devices, keep a record of the slots and ports into which specific devices are connected. You will need this information when configuring the G450.
Connecting a switch or a network data port

The G450 can provide network switching and also supports the connection of switches. You can connect the following to either of the ETH LAN ports on the G450 front panel:

One or more LAN switches The network data ports in the office
47
Connecting devices
Connecting a computer to the Services port

A laptop connected directly to the Services port of the G450 or S8300 Server requires a specific configuration of its network settings. Note: Make a record of any IP addresses, DNS servers, or WINS entries that you change when you configure your services laptop. Unless you use the NetSwitcher program or an equivalent, you will need to restore these entries to connect to other networks.
Note:
Configure TCP/IP properties. Set the laptop's TCP/IP properties as follows: - IP address: 192.11.13.5 - Subnet mask: 255.255.255.252 - Disable DNS service - Disable WINS Resolution Configure browser settings. Configure the laptops browser for a direct connection to the Internet. Either disable/bypass proxy servers, or enter 192.11.13.6 in the Exceptions box. Server address. Access the G450 or S8300 Server using the URL http://192.11.13.6. Note: The names of the dialog boxes and buttons vary on different operating systems and browser releases. Use your computer's help system if needed to locate the correct place to enter the configuration information.
Note:
Connecting an IP telephone
Note:
Note: For a full list of supported phones, see Appendix B, Supported Avaya telephones in Overview for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway, 03-602058.
Connect the IP telephone to an external Ethernet switch. This switch must be connected to a LAN port on the Avaya G450 Media Gateway. This port is labeled 10/5 or 10/6. If the telephone is not an Avaya IP telephone, you can connect it to any port on the network switch. Note the slot and port number on the Avaya G450 Media Gateway to which you connect the telephone.
Connecting the telephone to the G450

1. Wire a telephone port to a port on the switch connected to the G450 LAN port.If the switch is a PoE switch, you do not need to plug the IP telephone into a power supply. 2. Plug the telephone into the telephone port. 3. If the IP telephone will be powered independently, plug the IP telephone into a power supply and check that the IP telephone is powered up.
Connecting an ISDN BRI station

Each ISDN port on the MM720 Media Module supports up to two ISDN BRI stations. Note: The MM720 BRI Media Module cannot be administered to support both BRI trunks and BRI stations at the same time. Also, the MM720 BRI Media Module does not support combining both B-channels together to form a 128-kbps channel. Finally, if the MM720 BRI Media Module is administered to support BRI stations, it cannot be used as a clock synchronization source.
Note:
Connecting one ISDN BRI station to one ISDN port

Connect the station via a standard 8-pin BRI cable to one of the ISDN ports on an MM720 Media Module.
Connecting two ISDN BRI stations to one ISDN port

1. Connect each station to an RJ-45 splitter that provides two RJ-45 4-pair jacks, and one RJ-45 male connector. See Figure 9 for the correct wiring for the splitter. 2. Connect the male connector of the splitter to one of the ISDN ports on an MM720 Media Module.
49
Connecting devices
Figure 9: RJ-45 splitter wiring for connecting two ISDN BRI stations to one ISDN port
Figure 10: The MM720 media module
Connecting an analog telephone

Note:
Note: For a full list of supported phones, see Appendix B, Supported Avaya telephones in Overview for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway, 03-602058.
1. Wire a telephone port to one of the following analog ports: - A universal analog port on an MM711 media module - Any analog line port on a punch down block connected to an MM716 media module. To connect the MM716 media module to a punch down block to enable telephone connection, see Connecting devices to the MM717 and MM716 media modules on page 55. - A LINE port on an MM714 media module 2. Plug the analog telephone into the telephone port.
Note:
Note: Analog line ports support the following maximum distances: - For phone equipment with a ringer load above 3 REN (old mechanical ringers): - Up to 10,000 ft for 26 AWG wire - Up to 16,000 ft for 24 AWG wire - Up to 20,000 ft for 22 AWG wire - For modern phone equipment with a ringer load below 0.1 REN (electronic ringers): - Up to 20,000 ft for 26 AWG, 24 AWG, and 22 AWG wire
51
Connecting devices
Connecting a DCP telephone to an MM712 or MM717 media module

Note:
Note: For a full list of supported phones, see Appendix B, Supported Avaya telephones in Overview for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway, 03-602058. 1. Wire a telephone port to a DCP port on the G450. The following media modules provide DCP telephone ports: - MM712. 8 DCP ports - MM717. 24 DCP ports, provided via a single 25-pair amphenol socket on the front panel. To connect the MM717 media module to a punch down block to enable telephone connection, see Connecting devices to the MM717 and MM716 media modules on page 55.
2. Plug the DCP telephone into the telephone port.
!
WARNING:
WARNING: With the exception of the MM712, all DCP media modules are intended for in-building use only. Phone lines connected to these ports are not to be routed out-of-building. Failure to comply with this could cause harm to personnel and equipment.
Note:
Note: The MM712 and MM717 and media modules support the following maximum loop lengths: - Up to 5500 ft for 22 AWG wire - Up to 3500 ft for 24 AWG wire - Up to 2200 ft for 26 AWG wire
Connecting an analog trunk

1. Connect the trunk to one of the following ports: - Any universal analog port on an MM711 media module - Any analog line port on a punch down block connected to an MM716 media module. To connect the MM716 media module to a punch down block to enable trunk connection, see Connecting devices to the MM717 and MM716 media modules on page 55. Note: The MM716 media module does not support analog CO or CAMA trunks. - One of the ports marked TRUNK on an MM714 media module Note: For an analog DID trunk, you cannot use a TRUNK port on an MM714 media module. Instead, you must connect the trunk to one of the ports marked LINE on an MM711, MM714, or MM716 media module.
Note:
Note:
53
Connecting devices
Connecting an E1/T1 trunk

Connect the trunk cable to the E1/T1 port on an MM710 media module. The SIG LED lights. Figure 16: The MM710 media module
Connecting an ISDN BRI trunk

Connect the trunk to any ISDN port on an MM720 or MM722 media module. Note: In the US, you need to connect a separately purchased NT1 device to each ISDN port you use to connect an ISDN BRI trunk.
Note:
Connecting devices to the MM717 and MM716 media modules

The MM716 and MM717 media modules do not support direct connection of telephones or other endpoint devices. The MM716 and MM717 media modules each have a single 25-pair amphenol socket on the front panel, intended for use with a punch down block. Connect the front panel connector to a punch down block. You can terminate up to 24 endpoint devices on the connected punch down block.
Connecting the MM716 or MM717 front panel connector to a punch down block
1. Connect one end of a CAT5 cable with a 25-pair amphenol connector at each end to the 25-pair socket on the MM716 or MM717 front panel, so that the cable extends to the right of the G450. (The cable you use must be such that the connector you plug into the media module is 90 to the cable.) 2. Tighten the end screw of the amphenol connector to securely fasten the connector to the left side of the front panel socket. 3. Thread a tie wrap through the small bracket to the right of the front panel socket. 4. Fasten the tie wrap around the cable to secure the cable to the right side of the front panel socket. Figure 19: Attaching and securing the amphenol cable to the MM716 or MM717 25-pair socket
5. Connect the other end of the amphenol cable to a punch down block that converts the single amphenol connector to 24 RJ-45 or RJ-11 jacks, as needed. You can now connect endpoint devices to the RJ-45 or RJ-11 jacks. For the pin-out of the 25-pair connector, see Table 18.
55
Connecting devices
Step 2: Installing circuit protection

Out-of-building installations of telephones or other standard (tip/ring) devices/terminals that connect to the Avaya G450 Media Gateway Media Modules require over-voltage and sneak current protection in both buildings. Field installed sneak current protectors must have a maximum current rating of 350 mA and a minimum voltage rating of 600V. The following devices have been evaluated or tested and approved to protect the media modules from over-voltages and sneak current protection:
For the Avaya MM710 or MM340 T1/E1. Over-voltage and sneak current protection for the Avaya MM710 and MM340 are provided on the media modules themselves. For the Avaya MM711, MM714, and MM716 Analog. Over-voltage and sneak current protection for these interfaces is provided on the media modules/interfaces. Incoming trunks normally have over-voltage protection provided by the local telephone company. Analog voice terminals use one of the following types of combined over-voltage and sneak current protection at both building entry points: - Gas tube with heat coil. 4B1E-W - Solid state with heat coil. 4C1S - IROB. 146C (4-lines) or 146F (25-lines) For the Avaya MM712 DCP: either 146E IROB (In-Range Out-of-Building) or 4C3S-75 solid state protectors for over-voltage and sneak current. For the Avaya MM722 ISDN-BRI: over-voltage and sneak current protection are provided on the media modules themselves. For the Avaya MM720 ISDN-BRI: network-side applications require an NT-1 device. Tie trunk applications require either the 146E IROB (In-Range Out-of-Building) or 4C3S-75 solid state protectors for over-voltage and sneak current.
Step 3: Connecting to the Wide Area Network (WAN)
!
WARNING:
WARNING: Only service-trained personnel are to install these circuit protection devices. WARNING: With the exception of the MM712, all DCP media modules are intended for in-building use only. Phone lines connected to these ports are not to be routed out-of-building. Failure to comply with this could cause harm to personnel and equipment.
!
WARNING:
Step 3: Connecting to the Wide Area Network (WAN)

Since the G450 contains an internal router, you can connect the G450 directly to a WAN endpoint device. You can also connect a WAN endpoint device to the G450 via an external router.
Connecting a WAN to the G450

There are some differences in how to connect the WAN, depending on the type of WAN link you are connecting.
Connecting a WAN link to the MM342 media module

You must connect the WAN link to a device connected to the Avaya MM342 media module. To connect the WAN link, plug the WAN line into the USP port on the MM342 media module. This port is marked USP. To connect the WAN line to the port, use one of the following cable types, depending on the service providers equipment:

Avaya Serial Cable DTE V.35 Avaya Serial Cable DTE X.21
57
Connecting devices
Connecting an E1/T1 WAN link to the MM340 media module

To connect the WAN link, plug the WAN line into the E1/T1 port on the MM340 media module. This port is marked E1/T1. Use an unshielded twisted pair cable, straight or crossover, depending on the WAN equipment. Figure 21: The MM340 media module
Connecting an Ethernet WAN link

You must connect the Ethernet WAN line (DSL, firewall, etc.) to the Ethernet WAN port on the front panel of the Avaya G450 Media Gateway chassis. This port is marked ETH WAN. See Figure 6. Use a CAT5 Ethernet cable to connect the WAN line to the port.
Connecting an external router to the G450

You can connect a router to any of the following ports on the G450:

The ETH WAN ports on the G450 front panel The ETH LAN ports on the G450 front panel
Step 4: Installing the Coupled Bonding Conductor

The Coupled Bonding Conductor (CBC) provides mutual inductance coupling between the CBC and the telephone cables that are exposed to lightning. The conductor can be a 10 AWG (4 mm2) wire tie wrapped to the exposed cables, a metal cable shield around the exposed cables, or six spare pairs from the exposed cable. In a high-rise building, connect the CBC to an approved building ground on each floor.
Step 5: Installing the Avaya Partner Contact Closure Adjunct
Installing the CBC

Before you begin, be sure the telephone lines are cross-connected to the appropriate media module(s). 1. Connect one end of the conductor to a telephone cable building entrance protector ground that is connected to an approved ground. 2. Route the rest of the conductor next to the exposed telephone cables being protected until they reach the cross-connect nearest to the telephone system. 3. Terminate the other end to the single-point ground block provided for the telephone system. Note: Position the non-exposed telephone cables at least 12 in (30.5 cm) away from exposed telephone cables whenever possible.
Note:
Step 5: Installing the Avaya Partner Contact Closure Adjunct

The Contact Closure feature is a controllable relay providing dry contacts for various applications. To implement the contact closure feature, you connect an Avaya Partner Contact Closure Adjunct box to the CCA port on the G450 chassis. The adjunct box provides two contact closures that can be operated in either a normally closed or normally open state. The contact closures can control auxiliary devices such as devices that automatically lock or unlock doors or voice recording units. The CCA port can be configured so that the connected devices can be controlled by an end device, such as a telephone. For example, a user can unlock a door by keying a sequence into a telephone keypad.
Installing the contact closure

1. Follow the installation instructions in the Avaya Partner Contact Closure Adjunct Installation Instructions leaflet to install the Contact Closure and connect the auxiliary devices that will be activated and deactivated by the Contact Closure relays. 2. Note which device is connected to each relay. You will need this information for configuration. 3. Connect the Avaya Partner Contact Closure adjunct box to the CC port on the G450 front panel. Use a 24 gauge minimum telephone wire, no longer than 200 ft, with a standard four wire RJ-11 connector.
59
Connecting devices
Step 6: Installing an 808A Emergency Transfer Panel and associated telephones

The ETR feature provides basic telephone services in the event of system failure, such as a power outage or a failed connection to the MGC. The ETR feature can be used in conjunction with an analog media module (MM711, MM714, or MM716). The ETR panel provides up to five incoming Central Office (CO) trunk loops to 5 selected G450 analog lines. Thus, one ETR panel supports up to five emergency lines. You can cascade a second ETR panel, providing support for up to 10 emergency analog phones. ETR is activated automatically upon system failure by closing the tip/ring contacts between the analog lines and the analog trunks. When ETR is activated, all calls are directed by the analog relays between the outside lines and the analog telephones. A current-loop detection circuit prevents ongoing calls from being disconnected when normal functioning resumes. If a call is in progress on an outside line when the problem ends, the call continues. The trunk port and analog line port passing through the ETR panel do not start to operate until the active call ends. For information on installing the 808A Emergency Transfer Panel, see 808A Emergency Transfer Panel Installation Instructions, 03-602518, which ships with the Emergency Transfer Panel.
Step 6: Installing an 808A Emergency Transfer Panel and associated telephones
Figure 22: 808A Emergency Transfer Panel
Emergency Transfer Panel
CABLE RETAINER
LED
POWER
RATING -48V DC 0.08A
TRUNK / TEST SWITCHES

CIRCUIT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 1 2 LOOP START GROUND START
25-PAIR MALE CONNECTOR
TRUNK TYPE SELECTION SWITCHES
1 2 3 4 5
TRUNK OPTION: BOTH SWITCHES MUST BE THROWN TO ACTIVATE TRUNK OPTION NORMAL OPERATION
TEST SWITCH
TRANSFER TEST SWITCH ACTIVATED
TRUNK IDENTIFICATION
TRUNK LINE
TRUNK IDENTIFICATION LABEL
EXT
LOC
808A
cycmfig1 LAO 082107
61
Connecting devices
Chapter 4: Connecting and enabling a modem for remote access

You can connect a modem to the G450 to enable configuration from a remote location. A serial modem connected to the G450 can also be used for the modem dial backup feature, which provides a redundant connectivity with a remote primary Media Gateway Controller (MGC). Modem dial backup allows for more superior survivability than switching to a secondary MGC, since more features are preserved. If an S8300 is installed in the G450, leave a modem connected permanently to enable reporting of alarms to remote locations. Note: If you choose to configure the G450 by running an installation wizard, you can enable a modem with the wizard as part of the configuration. Instructions for connecting the modem are included in Appendix C: Running the Avaya Installation Wizard (Avaya IW) on page 151 and in Appendix D: Running the Gateway Installation Wizard (GIW) on page 209. You do not need to read this chapter.
Note:
Connecting and enabling a modem (G450 without S8300)

You can either connect a serial modem to the CON port on the G450 front panel or you can connect a USB modem to either of the two USB ports on the G450 front panel.
Connecting and enabling a serial modem

1. Prepare a PC with a CD-ROM drive and a TFTP server on the network. This may be needed for installing software and firmware upgrades. Note: When uploading firmware from the S8300 using TFTP, you may need to enable TFTP service in the Set LAN Security parameters of your web server. Note: Firmware upgrades for the G450 and media modules can either be installed from CD or downloaded from the Web.
Note:
Note:
63
Connecting and enabling a modem for remote access
2. Download Gateway Installation Wizard (GIW) from the Avaya Support website (support.avaya.com/avaygiw) to the laptop computer. The laptop should be running Windows 2000 or Windows XP to support GIW. 3. Plug one end of the provided flat RJ-45 to RJ-45 cable into the provided DB-9 adapter. 4. Plug the RJ-45 connector at the other end of the cable into the CON port of the G450. 5. Plug the DB-9 end of the flat cable into the COM port of the laptop computer. 6. From your laptop computer, double-click the GIW icon to run GIW. The Overview screen appears. 7. Click Continue. The COM Port Selection screen appears. Figure 23: COM Port Selection screen
8. Select the COM port on the laptop that you are using to connect to the G450. 9. Click Continue. The G450 Wizard Usage Options screen appears.
Figure 24: G450 Wizard Usage Options screen
10. Select Enable the modem for remote installation. 11. Click Continue. The G450 Modem Type Selection screen appears.
65
Figure 25: G450 Modem Type Selection screen
12. Select Serial Modem. 13. Click Continue. The G450 Serial Modem Configuration screen appears.
Figure 26: G450 Serial Modem Configuration screen
14. In the IP Address field, enter the RAS IP address of the modem obtained using the ART tool. See Running the Automatic Registration Tool (ART) for the RAS IP address on page 22. 15. Fill in the remaining modem information fields. 16. Select the authentication method:
If you have an Avaya Service contract, check Enable ASG Authentication to enable remote access to the device. If you do not have an Avaya Service contract: - Check Enable CHAP Authentication. - In the CHAP Secret field, enter the CHAP secret key obtained using the ART tool. See Running the Automatic Registration Tool (ART) for the RAS IP address on page 22. - In the Confirm CHAP Secret field, re-enter the CHAP secret key.
17. Click Continue. The Connect Modem screen appears.
67
Figure 27: Connect Modem screen
18. Click Finish. 19. Connect the serial modem to a working telephone line. 20. Connect the provided DB-25 adapter to the modem. 21. Disconnect the flat cable from the COM port of the laptop computer. 22. Connect the flat cable to the DB-25 connector on the modem.
Connecting and enabling a USB modem (G450 without S8300)

You can enable a MultiTech MT5634ZBA-USB USB modem on a USB port on the G450 front panel. Note: The MultiTech model MT5634ZBA-USB USB modem is the only USB modem supported by the G450. 1. Prepare a PC with a CD-ROM drive and a TFTP server on the network. This may be needed for installing software and firmware upgrades.
Note:
Note:
Note: When uploading firmware from the S8300 using TFTP, you may need to enable TFTP service in the Set LAN Security parameters of your web server. Note: Firmware upgrades for the G450 and media modules can either be installed from CD or downloaded from the Web. 2. Download GIW (Gateway Installation Wizard) from the Avaya Support website (support.avaya.com/avaygiw) to the laptop computer. The laptop should be running Windows 2000 or Windows XP to support GIW. 3. Plug one end of the provided flat RJ-45 to RJ-45 cable into the provided DB-9 adapter. 4. Plug the RJ-45 connector at the other end of the cable into the CON port of the G450. 5. Plug the DB-9 end of the flat cable into the COM port of the laptop computer. 6. From your laptop computer, double-click the GIW icon to run GIW. The Overview screen appears. 7. Click Continue. The COM Port Selection screen appears.
Note:
Figure 28: COM Port Selection screen
69
10. Select Enable the modem for remote installation. 11. Click Continue. The G450 Modem Type Selection screen appears.
Figure 30: G450 Modem Type Selection screen
12. Select USB Modem. 13. Click Continue. The G450 USB Modem Configuration screen appears.
71
Figure 31: G450 USB Modem Configuration screen
14. In the PPP IP Address field, enter the RAS IP address of the modem obtained using the ART tool. See Running the Automatic Registration Tool (ART) for the RAS IP address on page 22. 15. Enter the PPP Subnet Mask. 16. Select the authentication method:
17. Click Continue. The Connect Modem screen appears.
Figure 32: Connect Modem screen
18. Click Finish. 19. Connect a USB modem to a working telephone line. 20. Connect one end of a USB cable to the modem. 21. Connect the other end of the USB cable to a USB port on the G450 front panel. Note: The MultiTech model MT5634ZBA-USB USB modem is the only USB modem supported by the G450.
Note:
Testing the modem connection (G450 without S8300)

Dial into the modem to verify that you can authenticate to the modem.
73
Connecting and enabling a USB modem (G450 with S8300)

You can connect a USB modem to either of the two USB ports on the G450 front panel.
Maintenance web pages

Most of the preparations you are making require you to access the Maintenance web pages part of Avaya Integrated Management (AIM) from your laptop. After accessing the Maintenance web pages, leave the Maintenance web pages open until you have completed all the preparations.
Accessing the Maintenance web pages

1. Connect the laptop you prepared to the Services port on the S8300. Use a standard Ethernet crossover cable. 2. Configure the network settings on the laptop, according to the following tables: Table 3: TCP/IP settings Setting IP Address Subnet Mask DNS WINS Servers Value 192.11.13.5 255.255.255.252 disable do not use (clear out any values)
Table 4: Internet Browser Settings Setting Proxy Server Value disable
3. Open Internet Explorer, and browse to 192.11.13.6. The welcome screen for Avaya Integrated Management appears. 4. Click Continue. The Logon screen for Avaya Integrated Management appears.
Figure 33: Integrated Management Logon screen
5. Enter your S8300 initial entry username in the Logon ID box. 6. Click Logon. The password field appears. 7. Enter your password in the password field, and click Logon. The main menu for Avaya Integrated Management appears.
75
Figure 34: Integrated Management Main Menu
8. From the Integrated Management main menu, select Launch Maintenance Web Interface. The Maintenance Web Pages Notice page appears, with a navigation menu at the left.
Figure 35: Maintenance Web Pages Notice page
9. Leave the Maintenance Web Pages open to perform the tasks described in the coming sections.
Changing the modem settings on the Configure Server Maintenance Web Page
1. Select Configure Server from the left-hand menu on the Maintenance web page. The Back Up Data page appears. 2. Follow the on-screen instructions to back up the current data. 3. Click Continue. 4. Select Configure individual services. 5. Click Continue. 6. From the left navigation menu, click Set Modem Interface. The Set Modem Interface page appears. 7. Enter the RAS IP address you obtained using the ART tool. See Running the Automatic Registration Tool (ART) for the RAS IP address on page 22.
77
8. Click Change modem settings. 9. Click Continue. 10. Click Close Window. Note: You can only change the modem settings on the Configure Server Maintenance Web Pages if you have an Avaya Maintenance contract.
Note:

If your installation includes an S8300 Server module, you must connect the USB modem to the S8300. After the G450 is configured, you can leave the modem permanently connected to enable the S8300 to report alarms to remote locations. Note: If you require a USB CD-ROM drive to download software upgrades, connect the USB CD-ROM drive to the remaining available USB port on the S8300 module.
Note:
Connecting and enabling the modem

1. Connect the USB modem to a working telephone line. 2. Connect the modem to one of the USB ports on the S8300 module. 3. From the navigation menu of the Maintenance Web Pages, select Security > Modem. The Modem page appears. Figure 36: Modem page
4. Select Enable modem for unlimited incoming calls. 5. Click Submit.
Testing the modem connection (G450 with S8300)

1. Setup a dialup connection on a remote PC with the following settings:

Automatically detect settings. No Username, Password, or Domain. Security > Show Terminal Window.
2. Dial in to the modem from the remote PC. 3. When prompted, provide the rasaccess login and password in the Terminal Window. 4. Close the Terminal Window to complete the connection.
If a USB CD-ROM drive is required to download software upgrades

Connect the USB CD-ROM drive to the remaining available USB port on the S8300 module.
79
Chapter 5: Configuring the G450

The G450 requires software configuration. The G450 can be configured using:
The Avaya Installation Wizard (Avaya IW). Avaya IW is a wizard that prompts you for all configurations required to complete the installation of the G450. Avaya IW is used only to configure a G450 with an S8300. Refer to Appendix C: Running the Avaya Installation Wizard (Avaya IW) on page 151. The Gateway Installation Wizard (GIW). The GIW is a wizard that prompts you for all configurations required to complete the installation of the G450. You can run GIW to configure a G450 without an S8300. Refer to Appendix D: Running the Gateway Installation Wizard (GIW) on page 209. The Avaya G450 Command Line Interface (CLI). The CLI is a comprehensive tool for configuring the gateway and includes all supported configuration tasks. For information about configuration using the CLI, see Administration for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway, 03-602055. For detailed information on CLI commands, refer to the Avaya G450 CLI Reference, 03-602056.
The G450 can be configured at the customer site via a laptop connected to the CON port or Services port of the G450, or from a remote location via a modem. For information about connecting a laptop to the Services port, refer to Connecting a computer to the Services port on page 48. For information about connecting and enabling a modem, refer to Chapter 4: Connecting and enabling a modem for remote access on page 63.
81
Configuring the G450
Chapter 6: After installation

After initial configuration, it is necessary to test the installation, and remove the installation equipment.
Step 1: Testing the installation

When the installation is complete, simple tests must be performed to test telephone and data connectivity.
Testing data connectivity

Test data connectivity by pinging the IP address of each device to test the devices connectivity within the network and outside the network. Test local data connectivity on-site by checking that you can send an email between two PCs that are connected to the G450.
Testing telephones
1. Make outgoing calls from the telephone. Make sure you hear a dial tone when you pick up the receiver. Make sure you can make both an internal (within the local network) and an external (outside the local network) call. 2. Make a call to the telephone from both within the network and outside of the network.
Testing trunks
Use the facility test call feature to verify that each trunk is functioning properly. For information about how to use the facility test call feature, see Maintenance Procedures for Avaya Communication Manager, Media Gateways and Servers, 03-300432.
83
After installation
LSP failover testing

If you have an S8300 Server module installed in the G450 and configured as an LSP, you need to perform a test to make sure that the LSP takes over control of the G450 if the G450 becomes disconnected from the primary MGC. 1. Verify that valid translations are file synchronized to the LSP by logging into Avaya Communication Manager from the LSP and listing either stations or trunks (refer to Administrators Guide for Avaya Communication Manager, 555-233-506). Verify that the list of stations or trunks is valid. If the files are not synchronized, verify that you have correctly configured the required IP address(es) for the primary controller (MGC). If you are using Avaya IW to configure the G450, the following are key actions that must be done in the wizard to ensure correct IP address configuration: a. In the Usage options screen, select Install this media server as an LSP. The Primary Controller IP Address screen appears later in the wizard, and calls for the required primary controller IP addresses for your primary controller type. Refer to Table 5 for the IP addresses and controller information. b. In the Primary Controller IP address screen, enter all the required IP addresses for the primary controller type. There may be a delay after running AIW until the LSP is registered with the primary MGC and the translations are file synchronized. 2. If valid translations are not file synchronized to the LSP, do the following: a. From a SAT session run from the primary controller, verify that the LSP node-name and IP address are correctly entered. b. Use the save translation lsp command to start the file synchronization process. c. Log in again to Avaya Communication Manager from the LSP and list either stations or trunks. d. Verify that the list of stations or trunks is valid. 3. Disconnect the G450 from the primary controller, ensuring that all telephones are still connected to the G450. 4. Verify that calls can be made between local telephones and to outside telephones.
Step 2: Removing the installation equipment
Table 5: IP addresses and controllers Primary media gateway controller S8300 S8400 IP addresses to configure The IP address of the primary S8300 The IP address of the S8400s C-LAN or the IP address of an Ethernet port on the S8400 configured for processor Ethernet connections The IP address of the S8500s C-LAN or the IP address of an Ethernet port on the S8500 configured for processor Ethernet connections The IP address of the S8710s C-LAN and the IP address of alternate C-LAN boards connected to the S8710 The IP address of the S8720s C-LAN and the IP address of alternate C-LAN boards connected to the S8720 The IP address of the S8730s C-LAN and the IP address of alternate C-LAN boards connected to the S8730
S8500
S8710
S8720
S8730
Step 2: Removing the installation equipment

Remove all equipment that you used to assist you in the installation process. This may include the CD-ROM drive, the software upgrade CDs, the laptop computer, and the modem (for installations without an S8300 module only). Note: If you have an S8300 Server module installed in the G450, leave the modem connected to enable reporting of alarms to remote locations.
Note:
85
After installation
Chapter 7: Adding media modules and devices

When adding new devices to the G450, consult your project manager for topology requirements for specific ports to be connected to specific devices.
Adding a media module

Various media modules including voice modules or WAN modules can be added to the Avaya G450 Media Gateway.
Adding voice modules

You can hot-swap voice modules. This means you can add or remove a voice module in the Avaya G450 Media Gateway while the system is running, without any disruption to your network. Configuration of the G450 is not necessary when you add or remove a voice module. Configuration is only necessary when you add telephones, fax machines, and trunks to the new module. See Adding a telephone on page 89 and Adding a trunk on page 90. Some configuration of the Avaya Communication Manager is necessary when you install an MM710, MM720, or MM722 media module. See Administrators Guide for Avaya Communication Manager, 555-233-506. Also, for an MM710 or MM722, it is usually advisable to set the media module as the synchronization source of the G450. For information about setting the synchronization source of the G450, see Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager, Media Gateways and Servers, 03-300431.
Adding WAN modules

You can hot-swap WAN modules. This means you can add or remove a WAN module in the Avaya G450 Media Gateway while the system is running, but the G450 resets when you add or remove the module. However, hot insertion and removal is not recommended in most cases. Because hot insertion or removal resets the G450, any translation and other data that is in the running configuration but has not been saved to the startup configuration will be lost.
87
Adding media modules and devices
There is no configuration necessary when you add or remove a WAN module. Configuration is only necessary when you add WAN lines to the new module. See Adding a WAN line on page 91.
Adding a LAN device

You must connect, configure and test the LAN device before adding the device to the Avaya G450 Media Gateway. For instructions on connecting a new LAN device, see Connecting a switch or a network data port on page 47.
Configuring the LAN device on the G450

Configuration may be performed on site by connecting a laptop computer to the CON port or Services port of the G450, or remotely via a modem connected to the G450 or S8300. For information about connecting a laptop to the Services port, refer to Connecting a computer to the Services port on page 48. For information about preparing a modem, refer to Chapter 4: Connecting and enabling a modem for remote access on page 63. For information about configuration, refer to Chapter 5: Configuring the G450 on page 81.
Recording LAN information for software configuration

Before software configuration for the new LAN device takes place, gather the following information:

The name and location of the owner of or person responsible for the LAN device The slot and port number on the Avaya G450 Media Gateway to which the LAN device connects. If the LAN device is connected to an IP telephone, note the extension of the telephone to which the LAN device connects, and the slot and port number on the G450 to which the telephone connects.
Testing the LAN device

After installation and configuration of the LAN device is complete, ping the IP address of the device to test the devices connectivity within the network and outside the network.
Adding a telephone
Adding a telephone
You must connect, configure and test the telephone before adding the telephone to the Avaya G450 Media Gateway.
Connecting the telephone

To connect a new telephone, refer to of the following sections:

Connecting an IP telephone on page 48 Connecting an analog telephone on page 50 Connecting a DCP telephone to an MM712 or MM717 media module on page 52
Configuring the telephone on the G450

Configuration may be performed on site by connecting a laptop computer to the CON port or Services port of the G450, or remotely via a modem connected to the G450 or S8300. For information about connecting a laptop to the Services port, refer to Connecting a computer to the Services port on page 48. For information about preparing a modem, see Chapter 4: Connecting and enabling a modem for remote access on page 63. For information about configuration, see Chapter 5: Configuring the G450 on page 81.
Recording telephone information for software configuration

When you add a new telephone, note the following information for software configuration:

Name and location of the owner of the telephone Model number of the telephone Extension of the telephone Slot and port number on the Avaya G450 Media Gateway to which the telephone connects
Testing the telephone

1. Make outgoing calls from the telephone. Make sure you hear a dial tone when you pick up the receiver. Make sure you can make both an internal (within the local network) and an external (outside of the local network) call. 2. Make a call to the telephone from both within the network and outside of the network.
89
Adding a trunk
You must order, connect, configure, and test the trunk before adding the trunk to the Avaya G450 Media Gateway.
Ordering the trunk

Make sure to install the trunk near the physical location of the Avaya G450 Media Gateway Make sure that the telephone service provider installs the trunk and verifies that the trunk is working properly before you contact the technician that is performing or supervising the configuration Note the telephone number of the trunk
Special considerations when ordering an analog trunk

When you order an analog trunk, there are several recommendations depending on your systems particular needs:
For optimal functioning of the Emergency Transfer Relay feature, it is recommended to use a loop-start trunk For voice mail systems in the United States, it is recommended to use a ground start trunk to ensure that calls are properly disconnected when the outside caller disconnects For access to voice mail systems in the United States, it is recommended to use a ground start trunk to ensure that calls are properly disconnected when the outside caller disconnects. Ground start trunks may be provided via the MM711 media module. Request conditioned lines to ensure satisfactory voice quality and trunking interactions
Connecting the trunk

To connect a new trunk, see one of the following sections:

Connecting an analog trunk on page 53 Connecting an E1/T1 trunk on page 54 Connecting an ISDN BRI trunk on page 54
Adding a WAN line
Configuring the trunk on the G450

Recording trunk information for software configuration

When you add a new trunk, note the following information for software configuration:

Slot and port number on the Avaya G450 Media Gateway to which the trunk connects Telephone number of the trunk
Testing the trunk

1. Make outgoing calls from the trunk. Ask the technician that is performing or supervising the configuration for instructions how to access the trunk. Make sure you can make both an internal (within the local network) and an external (outside of the local network) call. 2. Make a call into the G450 trunk.
Adding a WAN line

You must order, connect, configure and test the WAN line before adding the line to the Avaya G450 Media Gateway.
Ordering the WAN line

If you need to order the WAN line, make sure that the service provider installs the line near the physical location of the G450 and verifies that the line is working before you configure the WAN on the G450.
91
Connecting the WAN line

To connect a WAN line, see Step 3: Connecting to the Wide Area Network (WAN) on page 57.
Configuring the WAN line on the G450

Recording WAN information for software configuration

When you add a new WAN line, note the following information for software configuration:
Slot and port number on the Avaya G450 Media Gateway to which the WAN line connects
Testing the WAN link

After installation of the WAN line is complete, test the link by verifying that the SIG LED for the port to which the link connects is lit. It is also recommended that you ping the IP address of a device using the WAN line and perform a trace route test in order to test connectivity with the network and outside the network.
Adding an Avaya Partner Contact Closure Adjunct

To install an Avaya Partner Contact Closure Adjunct, follow the instructions in Step 5: Installing the Avaya Partner Contact Closure Adjunct on page 59.
Chapter 8: Upgrading and replacing Field Replaceable Units

You can add or remove VoIP modules, the fan tray, or a power supply unit. Refer to Equipment List on page 295 for ordering information.
Adding or removing G450 main board modules

You can add or remove VoIP modules in the G450 main board. To do so, you must pull out the G450 main board. The G450 supports hot insertion and removal of the main board without power drop. However, all services are suspended while the G450 main board is out, and all calls are disconnected. Any translation and other data that is in the running configuration but has not been saved to the startup configuration is lost. ELECTROSTATIC ALERT: Hold the module only by the edges to avoid damage from static electricity. Do not touch the top or bottom of the circuit board. If possible, wear a wrist-strap and use an anti-static bag.
! CAUTION:
CAUTION:
The connector pins can be bent or damaged if the module is handled roughly, or if misaligned and then forced into position. Note: Consult your project manager before adding or removing VoIP modules in the G450.
Note:
Removing and inserting the G450 main board

1. To remove the G450 main board: a. Unscrew the two captive screws, one at each side of the G450 main board front panel. b. Open the latches on both sides of the main board. c. Grasp the latches and pull out the main board from its slot. d. Place the main board carefully on a table.
93
Upgrading and replacing Field Replaceable Units
2. To insert the G450 main board: a. Open the latches on both sides of the slot. b. Insert the G450 main board vertically into the slot. c. Push the main board in until the latches begin to close. d. Close and tighten the two captive screws on the front panel and then tighten the latches. e. Use the show platform mainboard CLI command to make sure everything is OK. Figure 37: Removing and inserting the G450 main board
Adding or removing VoIP modules: MP20 and MP80

The G450 main board has four slots for VoIP engines. Each slot can accommodate either an MP20 (Media Processor 20) module or an MP80 (Media Processor 80) module. An MP20 provides 20 channels, and an MP80 provides 80 channels. However, the G450 supports a maximum of 240 active channels. Therefore, the following number of active channels can be supported: 20, 40, 60, 80, 100, 120, 140, 160, 180, 200, or 240. Note that 220 channels cannot be supported. ELECTROSTATIC ALERT: Hold modules only by the edges to avoid damage from static electricity. Do not touch the top or bottom of the circuit board. If possible, wear a wrist-strap and use an anti-static bag.
! CAUTION:
CAUTION:
There is no configuration necessary when you install an MP20 or MP80 module. 1. To insert an MP20 or MP80 module: a. Locate the MP20 or MP80 module slot (see Figure 38).
Adding or removing G450 main board modules
Figure 38: Location of MP20 and MP80 modules
Figure notes: 1. MP20 or MP80 module slot 2. MP20 or MP80 module slot 3. MP20 or MP80 module slot 4. MP20 or MP80 module slot
b. Position the MP20 or MP80 module at a 45 degree angle to the main board, and start inserting it into an MP20 or MP80 slot (see Figure 39).
95
Figure 39: Adding or removing an MP20 or MP80 module
c. Push the module in all the way. Do not use too much force. d. Flatten the module so it is flush with the main board. The latches at both sides click shut. e. After powering up, use the show platform mainboard CLI command to make sure everything is OK. 2. To remove an MP20 or MP80 module: a. Open the latches on both sides of the module slot. The module lifts up. b. Pull out the module. Touch the module only at the edges.
Replacing the fan tray

The fan system is field replaceable. It is mounted on a fan tray that can be replaced as one unit. The G450 supports hot swap of the fan tray. There is no need to power down or reset the G450 when replacing a faulty fan tray unit. Prepare the new fan tray for insertion before removing the current the fan tray: take the new fan tray out of its package and place it nearby.
Replacing a power supply unit
!
Important:
Important: Replace the fan tray within one minute, to avoid overheating the G450. If the G450 exceeds its allowed heat level, it shuts down.
Figure 40: Replacing the fan tray
1. To remove the fan tray: a. Unscrew the two captive screws on the front panel of the fan tray. b. Grasp the screws and pull the fan tray out of its slot. 2. To insert the fan tray: a. Insert the fan tray all the way into the slot. b. Close and tighten the two captive screws on the front panel. The fans start operating immediately. c. Wait one minute and then use the show platform fans CLI command to make sure everything is OK.
Replacing a power supply unit

The G450 provides full redundant, load sharing power supply units (1 + 1). A single power supply unit provides sufficient power for any G450 configuration. If you choose to install two power supply units, they operate in a load sharing mode. The G450 supports hot swap of the power supply unit. Even if you have only one PSU unit installed, there is no need to power down or reset the G450 when replacing a faulty power unit. You can install the replacement PSU in the second PWR slot, and it will become the active PSU once you remove the faulty PSU.
97
Figure 41: Replacing a power supply unit
1. To remove a power supply unit: a. Disconnect the G450 power cable from the mains socket. b. Disconnect the G450 power cable from the power connector, located on the front panel of the power supply unit, at the rear of the G450. c. Loosen the two captive screws, one on each side of the power supply unit. d. Grasp the two side handles and pull the power supply unit out of its slot. 2. To insert a power supply unit: a. Position the power supply unit before the opening and engage both sides of the unit in the interior guides. b. Slide the power supply unit slowly into the chassis, maintaining an even pressure to assure that the unit does not become twisted or disengaged from the guides. c. Close and tighten the two captive screws on the front panel. d. Connect the power cable to the power connector on the power supply unit. e. Plug the power cable into a mains socket. f. After powering up, use the show platform power CLI command to make sure everything is OK. The upper PSU is referred to as PSU #1 in the CLI, and the lower PSU is PSU #2.
Chapter 9: Upgrading the Avaya Communication Manager software

If your Avaya G450 Media Gateway includes an Avaya S8300 Server, it might be necessary to upgrade the Avaya Communication Manager software. Upgrading the software can be performed in one of the following ways:
Remote configuration via Telnet upgrade the software remotely via Telnet. In this scenario, a modem is required at the local site. See Chapter 4: Connecting and enabling a modem for remote access on page 63. Local configuration with S8300 Media Gateway upgrade the software at the site, using a laptop computer and a CD-ROM drive connected to the S8300 Media Gateway Remote configuration via network upgrade the software remotely via a network connection
Upgrading the software using a CD-ROM drive

The upgrade software is usually installed from a CD-ROM drive connected to the S8300. If the upgrade is performed locally, you might need to provide a laptop and a USB CD-ROM drive. If the upgrade is performed from a remote location, you must connect a USB CD-ROM drive to the S8300 and insert the upgrade CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive. You also might need to connect a modem. This depends on the method used to perform the upgrade. For a software upgrade on an Avaya G450 Media Gateway with an S8300 Server, use a USB modem. The only supported USB modem is the Multitech MultiModem USB, MT5634ZBA-USB-V92.
Local configuration with S8300 Media Gateway

Upgrade the software at the site, using a laptop computer and a CD-ROM drive connected to the S8300 Media Gateway. 1. Connect the modem to a working telephone line. Note the telephone number of the line to which you connect the modem, so that you can provide the number to the technician who is performing or supervising the configuration.
99
Upgrading the Avaya Communication Manager software
2. Connect the USB modem to either of the two USB ports in the Avaya S8300 Server. Note: You may be required to enable the modem and port. For instructions on enabling the modem, see Chapter 4: Connecting and enabling a modem for remote access on page 63. 3. Connect a USB CD-ROM drive to the free USB port on the Avaya S8300 Server. Then, insert the CD-ROM provided by Avaya into the CD-ROM drive.
Note:
Upgrading the software without a CD-ROM drive

You can upgrade the Avaya Communication Manager software without a CD-ROM drive by downloading the upgrade software or installing it from a laptop computer.
Remote configuration
Remote configuration via Telnet upgrade the software remotely via Telnet. In this scenario, a modem is required at the local site. See Chapter 4: Connecting and enabling a modem for remote access on page 63. Remote configuration via network upgrade the software remotely via a network connection
Performing the upgrade

You can upgrade the S8300 using Avaya IW or the Upgrade tool. To upgrade S8300 software using Avaya IW, see Appendix C: Running the Avaya Installation Wizard (Avaya IW) on page 151. For information about upgrading S8300 firmware using the Upgrade tool, see Appendix D: Running the Gateway Installation Wizard (GIW) on page 209.
Chapter 10: Upgrading the G450 firmware

Software used to control the Avaya G450 Media Gateway itself and media modules installed on the G450 is called firmware. You can upgrade the firmware on the Avaya G450 Media Gateway and media modules using various different tools, each suitable for specific types of installation. Note: The G450 firmware also includes the firmware for the MM340 and MM342 media modules.
Note:
Upgrading G450 firmware using Avaya Software Update Manager

You can use Avaya Software Update Manager to view your network inventory and the firmware vintages of devices on your network. Avaya Software Update Manager can also check the software versions currently in use against the latest versions available from Avaya and recommend updates when a newer version is available. Based on this information, you can download new firmware to multiple network devices simultaneously from a single management station, ensuring all devices are updated. You can use Avaya Software Update Manager to take a new release from Avaya's website and store it on your hard disk for subsequent downloading to the appropriate devices. Avaya Software Update Manager is a server application hosted on the Avaya Network Management server. The server stores all the software retrieved from the Web and can download the software to appropriate devices. You may also copy files containing embedded software to the server. You can reach the server locally or via remote access, so you can update the software on your devices from anywhere in the world. Avaya Software Update Manager is part of the Integrated Management Enterprise Package which is an entitlement for all Avaya Communication Manager non-introductory offers. For information about using Avaya Software Update Manager, see the Avaya Software Update Manager 3.6 User Guide, 14-300168.
101
Upgrading the G450 firmware
Upgrading G450 firmware from the primary controller

For a G450 without an S8300 or for a G450 with an S8300 installed as an LSP, you can upgrade G450 firmware from the remotely located primary controller using the Upgrade Tool. The primary controller may be an S8300, S8500, or S8700-series server. If the G450 includes an LSP, you can also use the Upgrade Tool to upgrade the S8300 software on the LSP. For information about using the Upgrade Tool, see Job Aid: Upgrade Tool and Worksheets, 555-245-757. You can also refer to the guide for the primary controller for information about upgrading firmware from the primary controller. See Upgrading, Migrating, and Converting Avaya Servers and Gateways, 03-300412.
Upgrading G450 firmware using Gateway Installation Wizard (GIW)

1. Prepare installation worksheets. See Preparing installation worksheets on page 105. 2. Download GIW from the Avaya Support website (support.avaya.com/avayagiw) to the laptop computer. The laptop should be running Windows 2000 or Windows XP to support GIW. 3. Set up a TFTP server on the G450 network. See Setting up a TFTP server on page 107. The GIW runs the CLI commands on the G450 so the G450 can obtain the files from the TFTP server. 4. Download the G450 firmware files to the TFTP server. See Downloading G450 firmware files to a local TFTP server on page 108. 5. Run GIW to perform the upgrade. For instructions on performing the upgrade, see Appendix D: Running the Gateway Installation Wizard (GIW) on page 209. Note: This upgrade must be done locally. Note: You can only use GIW to upgrade firmware on a G450 that does not contain an S8300.
Note:
Note:
Upgrading G450 firmware and Avaya Communication Manager software using Avaya Installation Wizard
Upgrading G450 firmware and Avaya Communication Manager software using Avaya Installation Wizard (IW)
For a G450 with an S8300B installed, you can use Avaya IW to upgrade G450 firmware and Avaya CM software. You can run Avaya IW from a remote location if the software is loaded locally. You can point your browser to the ip address of the S8300B if you are in the customer network or via the modem connection. 1. Prepare installation worksheets. See Preparing installation worksheets on page 105. 2. Place the upgrade software and firmware files on a laptop. These files are on the Avaya Communication Manager CD-ROM. To upgrade the S8300 Server software and G450 firmware, insert the Communication Manager CD-ROM into a CD-ROM drive connected to a laptop. Alternatively, you can upload the individual files to the hard drive of the laptop. For more details, see Job Aid: Avaya Installation Wizard, 555-245-754. 3. Upgrade the S8300 Server using the Avaya Installation Wizard. For more details, see Job Aid: Avaya Installation Wizard, 555-245-754. This procedure also copies the G450 firmware as an RPM (Red Hat Package Manager) file from the Communication Manager CD-ROM into the /tftproot directory on the S8300. Note: The CD-ROM may not contain the latest firmware. Therefore, you should check the Avaya Support website for the latest firmware versions and match these against the versions in the directory. If the CD-ROM does not contain the latest versions, you should download the latest versions from the Avaya Support website to the laptop. 4. Connect the laptop to the services port of the S8300 Server. 5. Access Avaya IW. See Accessing Avaya IW on page 151. 6. Run Avaya IW to perform the required upgrades:
Note:
See Upgrading an existing MGC on page 160 for instructions for upgrading Avaya CM software See Firmware configuration on page 177 for instructions for upgrading G450 firmware
103
Upgrading G450 firmware using the CLI via FTP/TFTP

You can upgrade firmware via FTP/TFTP using the CLI. You can perform the upgrade remotely via a modem connection, but the upgrade files must first be downloaded to an FTP or TFTP server on the LAN connected to the G450. 1. Prepare installation worksheets. See Preparing installation worksheets on page 105. 2. Set up an FTP or TFTP server on the LAN connected to the G450. For information about setting up a TFTP server, see Setting up a TFTP server on page 107. Note: If you use an FTP server, the G450 prompts you for a username and password when you enter a command to transfer a file. Also, when opening an FTP connection to the S8300, all anonymous FTP file transfers are restricted to the /var/home/ftp/pub directory. Permission for anonymous FTP users to create files in other directories is denied. 3. Download the firmware files to the FTP or TFTP server. See Downloading G450 firmware files to a local TFTP server on page 108 or Installing firmware from the TFTP server on the S8300 Server on page 109. 4. Connect to the G450 via modem or via the CON port on the front panel. For information about connecting and enabling a modem for remote access, see Chapter 4: Connecting and enabling a modem for remote access on page 63. 5. Run CLI commands. See CLI commands for upgrading G450 firmware via FTP/TFTP on page 104.
Note:
CLI commands for upgrading G450 firmware via FTP/TFTP

You can use CLI commands to upload an upgrade file to the G450. For each of these commands, include the full path of the file and the IP address of the FTP or TFTP host as parameters. You must use the specific path to the file on the FTP or TFTP server according to the home directory of the service (FTP or TFTP) that you are using. When you enter the command, the CLI prompts you for a username and password.
Use the copy ftp EW_archive command to upgrade the Java applet for Avaya G450 Manager software from an FTP server Use the copy ftp module command, followed by the module number of the module you want to upgrade, to upgrade the firmware on a media module from an FTP server Use the copy ftp SW_imageA command to upgrade the G450 firmware into Bank A from an FTP server Use the copy ftp SW_imageB command to upgrade the G450 firmware into Bank B from an FTP server
Use the copy tftp EW_archive command to upgrade the Java applet for Avaya G450 Manager software from a TFTP server Use the copy tftp module command, followed by the module number of the module you want to upgrade, to upgrade the firmware on a media module from a TFTP server Use the copy tftp SW_imageA command to upgrade the G450 firmware into Bank A from a TFTP server Use the copy tftp SW_imageB command to upgrade the G450 firmware into Bank B from a TFTP server
Example upgrade via FTP/TFTP using the CLI

To upgrade the firmware of an MM712 media module in slot 3 from a TFTP server with the IP address 192.1.1.10, where the home directory is c:\home\ftp\ and the upgrade file is located in the directory c:\home\ftp\version, use the following command: copy tftp module \version\mm712v51.fdl 192.1.1.10 3 Note: When uploading firmware from the S8300, use only the file name, without the directory path, in the command line. Otherwise, the procedure will fail. For instance, in the example above, you must use the following command: copy tftp module mm712v51.fdl 192.1.1.10 3 Note: When uploading firmware from the S8300 using TFTP, you may need to enable TFTP service in the Set LAN Security parameters of your web server.
Note:
Note:
The following example uploads a firmware version with the path and file name C:\g450.net from an FTP server with the IP address 149.49.134.153 to Bank A of the G450: copy ftp SW_imageA C:\g450.net 149.49.134.153
Preparing installation worksheets

Before you perform the upgrade, you must enter the names of the target software and firmware versions that you need to install in the software and firmware upgrade worksheet. If you will need to set up a TFTP server, you also need to plan the TFTP server IP address, login, and password.
105
Entering values in Server Values worksheet

Enter software and firmware upgrade file names in the following table: Table 6: Software and firmware upgrade file names Items for Upgrading File for LSP and primary controller (not used with Gateway Installation Wizard or for individual files) G450 Processor G450 Device Manager MM710 E1/T1 Media Module MM711 Analog Port/Trunk Media Module MM712 DCP Media Module MM714 Analog Port/Trunk Media Module MM716 Analog Port/Trunk Media Module MM717 24-port DCP Media Module MM720 BRI Media Module MM722 BRI Trunk Media Module New file name for target
Enter the TFTP server information in the following table: Table 7: Global Settings for TFTP Server TFTP Server IP Address TFTP Server Directory
Setting up a TFTP server

To load individual firmware files on an Avaya G450 Media Gateway, you must place the files on a PC connected to the customers LAN or on an S8300 Server in the customers network. Later, you will log onto the G450 and use its TFTP capability to download the new firmware. If you can use an S8300 Server to stage the firmware, see Installing firmware from the TFTP server on the S8300 Server on page 109. If not, a TFTP server must be set up on the LAN. Note: A Linux or Unix TFTP server should be used only if a Linux or Unix TFTP server already exists on the local network. In this case, download the appropriate files to your laptop and give it to the customer for proper placement and execution.
Note:
Setting up a TFTP on the LAN

1. On the hard drive of the local PC, create a directory into which you will load the G450 firmware. It is recommended that you call the directory C:\tftp. 2. Connect to the LAN using Microsoft Internet Explorer on the local PC and access http:// www.avaya.com/support on the Internet. 3. Search for software downloads for 4600 series IP telephones. 4. Double-click one of the links listed with TFTP Server. The TFTP Server is on the Communication Manager CD-ROM. For example: 4630 IP Telephone R 1.73 and TFTP Server. 5. Scroll to the bottom of the page to find the TFTP Server Application file, iptel_avaya_tftp.exe. 6. Double-click the file and download it to the local PC that will serve as the TFTP server. Record the directory location of the file. Note: You may also wish to download and view or print the file iptel.pdf, which provides instructions on installing iptel_avaya_tftp.exe for Windows servers. 7. After downloading the iptel_avaya_tftp.exe file to the PC, double-click the file and follow instructions to install it. By default, the installation program creates the directory C:\Program Files\Walusoft\TFTPSuite containing the application files. 8. When the file has been installed, go to the directory where the software was installed and double-click the file tftpserver32.exe to open the program. The TFTP Server window appears and displays the IP address of the PC in the upper border, plus port 69. 9. Enable the TFTP server as follows: a. From the System menu, select Setup. The server option window appears.
Note:
107
b. Select the Outbound tab, and enter the directory location of the TFTP server for the outbound file path. c. Select the Options tab, and enter 69 in the Use Port field (default). d. Select No Incoming (default). However, if you wish to copy files as a backup prior to performing a software upgrade, leave this field unselected. e. Select the Inbound tab, and enter the directory path of the TFTP server for the inbound file path. f. Click OK.
Downloading G450 firmware files to a local TFTP server

1. Access the www.avaya.com/support website. 2. Navigate to G450 Media Gateway downloads. 3. Locate the file names that match the files listed in your installation worksheet. See Table 8 for sample firmware file names. 4. Double-click the file name of the file you want to download. A File Download window appears. 5. Select Save this file to disk. 6. Save the file to directory on the TFTP server on the local LAN that was created for this purpose. See Setting up a TFTP server on page 107. Note: If you are performing the upgrade using the G450s Command Line Interface (CLI) or the Upgrade Tool, you can place the upgrade files on an FTP server. However, the GIW requires that the files be placed on a TFTP server. Note: Use WinZip or another zip file tool to unzip the file, if necessary, before you copy the file to the TFTP server. Table 8: Sample Software and Firmware File names Component G450 Processors G450 Processor G450 Device Manager g450_sw_21_11_0.bin g450_emweb_1_0_7.bin 1 of 2 File name Example
Note:
Note:
Table 8: Sample Software and Firmware File names (continued) Component Media Modules MM710 E1/T1 Media Module MM711 Analog Port/Trunk Media Module (version 6 or earlier) MM711 Analog Port/Trunk Media Module (version 7) MM711 Analog Port/Trunk Media Module (version 20 or later) MM712 DCP Media Module MM714 Analog Port/Trunk Media Module MM716 Analog Port/Trunk Media Module MM717 DCP Media Module MM720 BRI Media Module MM722 BRI Media Module mm710v3.fdl mm711v16.fdl mm711h7v21.fdl mm711h20v54.fdl mm712v14.fdl mm714v5.fdl mm716v80.fdl Mm717v3.fdl mm720v1.fdl mm722v3.fdl 2 of 2 File name Example
Installing firmware from the TFTP server on the S8300 Server

Instead of using a separately configured TFTP server on the LAN, you can use the TFTP server capability of an S8300 Server to stage the firmware for upgrading the G450. To do this, you must copy the individual firmware files to the /var/home/ftp/pub directory on the S8300 Server using the Download Files web page on the S8300 Server. You must then copy the files to the /tftpboot directory of the S8300 Server. After copying the files to the /tftpboot directory, you can use the GIW or the Upgrade Tool to install the files to the G450 or its media modules by specifying the S8300 Servers IP address as the TFTP server containing the new firmware files. Note: You only have to do this if you have not upgraded the S8300 first or if you did upgrade it first and found that the gateway files on the communication manager CD were out of date. Otherwise, when you upgrade the S8300, the files appear in the /tftpboot directory automatically.
Note:
109
Copying firmware files to the /tftpboot directory of an S8300 Server

1. Use Telnet, Avaya Site Administration, or another tool to access the S8300 Server command line. 2. Log in as craft. 3. At the Linux prompt, type cd /var/home/ftp/pub and press <Enter>. The Linux prompt reappears. The current directory has changed to /var/home/ftp/pub. 4. At the Linux prompt, type mv <firmware_filename> /tftpboot, and press <Enter> to move the firmware file to the /tftpboot directory. To move multiple firmware files (most firmware files have an .fdl suffix), use the command mv *.fdl /tftpboot. The Linux prompt reappears. The firmware file has been moved to the /tftpboot directory. If you copy the firmware using the cp command, remove the files from the /var/home/ftp/pub directory after you have copied them. 5. Repeat step 4, if necessary, for each firmware file you want to install. 6. At the Linux prompt, type cd /tftpboot. The Linux prompt reappears. The current directory has changed to /tftpboot. 7. At the Linux prompt, type ls, and press <Enter>. A list of files in the directory appears. 8. Check the directory to make sure the firmware files you want to install are listed.
Upgrading G450 firmware using the CLI via a USB device
Upgrading G450 firmware using the CLI via a USB device

You can upgrade firmware via a USB mass storage device using the CLI. The upgrade files must first be downloaded to a local PC. 1. Prepare installation worksheets. See Preparing installation worksheets on page 105. 2. Download the firmware files to a PC. See Downloading G450 firmware files to a local PC on page 112. 3. Insert a USB mass storage device into the PCs USB port, and copy the firmware files to the USB mass storage device. 4. Remove the USB mass storage device from the PC, and insert it into a G450 USB port. 5. Run CLI commands to copy the firmware files from the USB mass storage device to the G450. See CLI Commands for upgrading G450 firmware via a USB device on page 111.
CLI Commands for upgrading G450 firmware via a USB device

You can use CLI commands to upload an upgrade file from a USB mass storage device to the G450. You must use the specific path to the file on the USB mass storage device.
Use the copy usb EW_archive command to upgrade the Java applet for Avaya G450 Manager software from a USB mass storage device Use the copy usb module command, followed by the slot number of the module you want to upgrade, to upgrade the firmware on a media module from a USB mass storage device Use the copy usb SW_imageA command to upgrade the G450 firmware into Bank A from a USB mass storage device Use the copy usb SW_imageB command to upgrade the G450 firmware into Bank B from a USB mass storage device
Example upgrade using the CLI via a USB device

To upgrade the firmware of an MM712 media module in slot 3 from a USB mass storage device where the upgrade file is located in the directory \temp\, use the following command: copy usb module usb-device0 \temp\mm712v51.fdl 3
111
Downloading G450 firmware files to a local PC

1. Access the www.avaya.com/support website. 2. Navigate to G450 Media Gateway downloads. 3. Locate the file names that match the files listed in your installation worksheet. See Table 8 for sample firmware file names. 4. Double-click the file name of the file you want to download. A File Download window appears. 5. Select Save this file to disk. 6. Save the file to a directory on the local PC. Note: Use WinZip or another zip file tool to unzip the file, if necessary, before you copy the file to the PC.
Note:
Chapter 11: Upgrading IP phone configuration and firmware files

The Avaya G450 Media Gateway supports Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) downloading of configuration files and firmware files for IP phones. TFTP can be used to download image files, upgrade scripts, and settings files to IP phones. The local TFTP server stores the files and supports requests to read files from the its outgoing directory for phone images and scripts. You can use CLI procedures for downloading the files for IP phone upgrade from the G450 TFTP server. Note: You can also upgrade IP phones using the S8300. For more details refer to http://support.avaya.com/elmodocs2/white_papers/ TFTP_HTTP_Download_External_060504.pdf
Note:
IP telephones supported by the local TFTP Server feature

4601 4602 4602SW 4606 4610SW 4612/24 4620 4620SW 4690 SIP phone: 4602 SIP
IP telephones not supported by the local TFTP Server feature

4630 4630SW Note: If you have an S8300 installed in the G450, you can alternatively upgrade IP phones using the CM web pages.
Note:
113
Upgrading IP phone configuration and firmware files
Note:
Note: You can also upgrade IP phones using Avaya IW or GIW, as described in Appendix C: Running the Avaya Installation Wizard (Avaya IW) on page 151 and Appendix D: Running the Gateway Installation Wizard (GIW) on page 209. Note: An alternative tool, the Avaya Software Update Manager (4.0 or higher), is a GUI application that greatly simplifies the IP phone upgrade process, avoiding the need to know the file names of the necessary upgrade files for each IP phone type. For further information, see Avaya Software Update Manager User Guide, 14-300168. Note: The IP address of the TFTP server is the PMI.
Note:
Note:
Administering the upgrade

When using supported IP phones with the G450, the IP phones require the downloading of the settings file and the upgrade scripts. These files are stored in the script banks in NVRAM and are preserved in the event of a reset or power failure. There are two script banks. In addition, each phone can have a booter application and a phone application. There are four banks that can store up to two phone images (booter and phone application files) at any given time. Since the image files are stored in RAM, a reset or power failure erases these files. The image files are used only for upgrading the IP phone, so there is no need to store them permanently. However, the scripts are used by the IP phones when they are reset, and are therefore stored in NVRAM. You can upgrade up to two types of phones and then release the banks for use with another IP phone type. There are cases where the image files are the same for different IP phone types. In these cases, you can download the image files once for the IP phones that use the same image. The scripts are global to all the supported IP phone images. You can download and then upload setting script files in order to update their content. It is not recommended to change the upgrade script. By default, the RAM allocation for TFTP server is 10 MB. You can increase the RAM allocation for TFTP server to up to 11.264 MB at the expense of the Sniffer cache application. The maximum RAM for both applications is 12 MB. There are four image banks, supporting two IP phone images in RAM, provided the combined file sizes do not exceed the RAM allocation for TFTP server. The maximum size for a booter application or phone application file is 4.5 MB. Thus, it is possible that in some cases, the allocation may only suffice for one complete IP phone image and not two.
Administering the upgrade
! CAUTION:
CAUTION:
To activate a change in RAM allocation to the TFTP server, reset is required. Upon reset, any phone image files stored in RAM are erased. Note: Previous releases of TFTP server required the configuration of the DHCP server option 43/176 with the named value pair TFTPDIR=/phonedir/ in order to allow the IP phone to access the files in this directory. This configuration is still supported but is no longer required.
Note:
Upgrading the IP telephone

IP phone upgrade files include script files, boot images files, and phone application image files. You can download these files to a remote FTP/TFTP/SCP server, or you can download them to a laptop and copy them to a USB device. You can then copy the upgrade files to the G450. Note: An SCP server can be used for copying the script files, which do not exceed 128 KB, but cannot be used for copying image files. Note: The G450 uses the SSH protocol to support the use of SCP for secure file transfer. When using SCP, the G450 is the SCP client, and an SCP server must be configured on the management station. For more information about establishing an SCP session, see Administration for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway, 03-602055. 1. Check the available memory size for the image files using the show application-memory command. If the memory size needs to be changed, proceed to step 2, otherwise proceed to step 6. 2. Set the memory size for the image files using the ip tftp-server file-system size command. 3. Copy the running configuration to the start-up configuration using the copy running-config startup-config command. 4. Reset the G450 using the reset command. 5. From the Avaya Support website, obtain the desired phone upgrade files (script files, boot image files, phone application image files), using either of the following methods: - Download the phone upgrade files to a remote FTP/TFTP/SCP server. Note that SCP can be used to download script files but not image files. - Download the upgrade files to a laptop and copy them to a USB mass storage device.
Note:
Note:
115
6. Copy the script files for the IP phone family. - To copy from the remote FTP/SCP/TFTP server, use one of the following commands:

copy scp phone-script copy ftp phone-script copy tftp phone-script
- To copy from the USB device, insert the USB device into a G450 USB port and copy the files to the resident TFTP server using the copy usb phone-script command. 7. Copy the boot image files for up to two IP phone types. - To copy from the remote FTP/TFTP server, use either the copy ftp phone-image command or the copy tftp phone-image command for each IP phone type. - To copy from the USB device, insert the USB device into a G450 USB port and copy the files to the resident TFTP server using the copy usb phone-image command. 8. Copy the phone application image files for up to two IP phone types. - To copy from the remote FTP/TFTP server, use either the copy ftp phone-image command or the copy tftp phone-image command for each IP phone type. - To copy from the USB device, insert the USB device into a G450 USB port and copy the files to the resident TFTP server using the copy usb phone-image command. 9. Reset the phones and wait for the installation to be completed. Note: Once the upgrade procedure is complete, you can delete the files using the erase phone-image command.
Note:
TFTP IP telephone upgrade examples

In the following example, 4602SW and 4602D phones, which use the same image files, are upgraded first. Later, 4620 phones are upgraded. The script files are not copied for the second upgrade, since they are already stored in NVRAM.
Upgrading the 4602SW and 4602D phones

1. Check the available memory size for the image files using the show application-memory command. If the memory size is smaller than the combined sizes of the image files for the phones, proceed to step 2, otherwise proceed to step 5. 2. Set the memory size for the image files using the ip tftp-server file-system size command. For example:
G450-001(super)# ip tftp-server file-system-size 18128 To change ip tftp-server file system size, copy the running configuration to the start-up configuration file, and reset the device G450-001(super)
3. Copy the running configuration to the start-up configuration using the copy running-config startup-config command. For example:
G450-001(super)# copy running-config startup-config Beginning copy operation ................... Done!
4. Reset the G450 using the reset command. For example:

G450-001(super)# reset This command will reset the device *** Reset the device *** - do you want to continue (Y/N)? y Resetting the device...
5. From the Avaya Support website, download the desired phone upgrade files (script files, boot image files, phone application image files) to a remote FTP server at IP address 192.168.49.10.
117
6. Copy the script files for the 46xx IP phone family using the copy ftp phone-script command. For example:
G450-001(super)# copy ftp phone-scriptA 46xxupgrade.txt 192.168.49.10 Confirmation - do you want to continue (Y/N)? y Username: root Password: Beginning download operation ... This operation may take up to 20 seconds. Please refrain from any other operation during this time. For more information , use 'show download phone-script-file status' command G450-001(super)# G450-001(super)# copy ftp phone-scriptB 46xxupgrade.txt 192.168.49.10 Confirmation - do you want to continue (Y/N)? y Username: root Password: Beginning download operation ... This operation may take up to 20 seconds. Please refrain from any other operation during this time. For more information , use 'show download phone-script-file status' command G450-001(super)#
7. Copy the boot image files for the Avaya 4602 IP telephone using the copy ftp phone-image command. For example:
G450-001(super)# copy ftp phone-imageA pub\4602dbte1_8.bin 192.168.49.10 Username: root Password: Beginning download operation ... This operation may take up to 20 seconds. Please refrain from any other operation during this time. For more information , use 'show download phone-image-file status' command G450-001(super)# copy ftp phone-imageB pub\4602sbte1_8.bin 192.168.49.10 Username: root Password: Beginning download operation ... This operation may take up to 20 seconds. Please refrain from any other operation during this time. For more information , use 'show download phone-image-file status' command
8. Copy the phone application image files for the 4602 IP phone type DEF4602D using the copy ftp phone-image command. For example:
G450-001(super)# copy ftp phone-imageC pub\4602dape_8.bin 192.168.49.10 Username: root Password: Beginning download operation ... This operation may take up to 20 seconds. Please refrain from any other operation during this time. For more information , use 'show download phone-image-file status' command G450-001(super)# copy ftp phone-imageD pub\4602sape_8.bin 192.168.49.10 Username: root Password: Beginning download operation ... This operation may take up to 20 seconds. Please refrain from any other operation during this time. For more information , use 'show download phone-image-file status' command
9. Reset the phones and wait for the installation to be completed.
Upgrading 4620 IP phones after the script files are already stored in NVRAM
1. Copy the boot image files for the 4620 IP phone using the copy ftp phone-image command. For example:
G450-001(super)# copy ftp phone-imageA pub\bbla20_1817.bin 192.168.49.10
Username: root Password: Beginning download operation ... This operation may take up to 20 seconds. Please refrain from any other operation during this time. For more information , use 'show download phone-image-file status' command
119
2. Copy the phone application image files for the 4620 IP phone using the copy ftp phone-image command. For example:
G450-001(super)# copy ftp phone-imageB pub\def20r1_8_1.bin 192.168.49.10 Username: root Password: Beginning download operation ... This operation may take up to 20 seconds. Please refrain from any other operation during this time. For more information , use 'show download phone-image-file status' command
Note:
Note: Once the upgrade procedure is complete, you can delete the files using the erase phone-image command.
Failure scenarios and repair actions

There are various configuration related problems which will cause the upgrade to fail. The scenarios can be repaired by readjusting the downloading or configuration settings. Table 9: Failure scenarios and repair actions Problem Free Application Memory is xxx MB. Use show application-memory for more details Possible cause You tried to configure more memory than is available in the main bank. Action Re-adjust the allocation of memory between the Sniffer cache application and the TFTP server. Be sure the Sniffer allocation is not needed for trouble shooting. None. The memory allocations are set to the default values.
Application Memory reached its limits. Sniffer and TFTP server application memory sizes restore to defaults
You tried to download configuration files after configuring the total memory allocations for applications and Sniffer to more than 12 Mb in the startup configuration and performing a reset.
Cannot download file to Gateway
Refer to the specific error message you receive. 1 of 2
Upgrading considerations
Table 9: Failure scenarios and repair actions (continued) Problem "Not enough memory in RAM" Possible cause The remote file is larger than the available RAM. Action Free more space in the RAM using the erase phone-script or erase phone-image command. Free space in the NVRAM using the erase phone-script command. None. You cannot load two files with the same file name to more than one bank. Check the file name and path. Upload from a different bank. Download a file to the bank. 2 of 2
"Not enough memory in NVRAM"
The remote file is larger than the available NVRAM.
"File already Exists in other Bank"
You tried to download the same file to more than one bank. File name or path incorrect You are trying to upload a file from an empty bank.
TFTP - General failure Can't start upload operation. Wrong operation parameters or other operation already in progress, please try again
Upgrading considerations
Configuration files, such as upgrade script and setting files, are copied to the phone configuration banks in NVRAM, while phone images are stored in RAM Note: Image files are cleared if you reset the gateway.
Note:
Phone image banks are stored in the same TFTP directory. Therefore, you cannot copy the same file name to more then one bank. Copying a file to a bank containing a file with the same file name causes the old file to be overwritten by the new one. File names for IP phone image files and script files are limited to 32 characters
121
Chapter 12: Backing up and restoring the G450

You can backup and restore the G450 to/from a USB mass storage device using a single CLI command for backup and a single CLI command for restore. This is especially helpful for efficient restoring or replicating of a G450 media gateway. If the G450 is located remotely, you can backup and restore the G450 files one by one, using TFTP/FTP/SCP servers. For information about G450 backup and restore, see chapter 5 in Administration for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway, 03-602055.
123
Backing up and restoring the G450
Chapter 13: Troubleshooting

You can have problems with phones, a trunk, the power, or the WAN line. It is necessary to identify the specific problem to figure out how it can be resolved. In addition, you may have to perform an NVRAM initialization if you are unable to access the CLI.
One telephone stops working

If one telephone in the network stops working, but the other telephones and data devices continue to work normally, the problem is probably with the telephone itself. There could also be a problem with the telephones connection to the Avaya G450 Media Gateway, or a power management event, in which the power budget is exceeded and low priority ports are disconnected.
Identifying the problem when one phone stops working

1. Replace the telephone. If the new telephone works, the problem is with the telephone itself. If the new telephone does not work, go on to the next step. 2. Connect the telephone to a different power supply. If the telephone works, the problem is with the original power supply. If the telephone still does not work, go on to the next step. 3. Connect the telephone to a different network port. If the telephone works, the problem is with the original network port. If the telephone still does not work, go on to the next step. 4. Check the module on the Avaya G450 Media Gateway to which the telephone is connected. Check whether the physical connection is loose, and tighten the connection if necessary. If the telephone still does not work, go on to the next step. 5. Check the LEDs on the module to which the telephone connects. Make sure the LED for the port to which the telephone is connected is lit. If it is not lit, the problem may be with the port or the module. If the ALM LED is lit, this is also an indication that there is a problem with the port or the module. Note the port and module and contact your project manager. For information on the various modules and their LEDs, see Appendix A: Front panel description on page 131.
125
Troubleshooting
Several telephones stop working

If some telephones in the network stop working, but others continue to work, the problem could be with a trunk or with one of the modules in the G450.
Identifying the problem when several phones stop working

1. Determine whether all the telephones that are affected connect to the same switch or port. If they do, the problem is probably with that switch or port. If they do not, go on to the next step. 2. Determine whether all the telephones that are affected connect to the same module. If they do, check the LEDs on that module. If the ALM LED is lit, there may be a problem with the module. Contact your project manager. If not, go on to the next step. For information on the various modules and their LEDs, see Appendix A: Front panel description on page 131. 3. Check the ALM LED on the Avaya G450 Media Gateway chassis. If it is lit, there may be a system-wide problem. Contact your project manager. For information on the chassis, see Appendix A: Front panel description on page 131.
No power on the G450

1. Check the AC power source with a voltmeter. 2. Connect the Avaya G450 Media Gateway to a different AC power source. If the G450 has power, the problem is with the original power source. If the G450 still does not work, go on to the next step. 3. Check the ALM LED on the Avaya G450 Media Gateway chassis. If it is lit, there may be a system-wide problem. Contact your project manager. See Appendix A: Front panel description on page 131.
A trunk stops working

1. Check the connection between the trunk and the Avaya G450 Media Gateway. If the physical connection is loose, tighten the connection. If the trunk still does not work, go on to the next step.
A WAN line stops working
2. Check the ALM LED on the module to which the trunk connects. If it is lit, see Maintenance Alarms for Communication Manager 2.1, Media Gateways and Servers, 03-300190 for testing procedures.
A WAN line stops working

1. Check the connection between the WAN line and the Avaya G450 Media Gateway. If the physical connection is loose, tighten the connection. If the line still does not work, go on to the next step. 2. Check the ALM LED on the module to which the WAN line connects. If the ALM LED is lit, the problem may be the configuration of the module or a lack of T1 signal. You can try the following: - For E1/T1 interfaces, use the show controllers command to view the status of the interfaces controller. Make sure the controller is up, and that all error counters do not increase. - For all serial interfaces (E1/T1 and USB), use the show interfaces Serial command to verify that the interface and line protocol are both up. - For USB interfaces only, use the show interfaces Serial command to verify that all line signals are up. - Swap the module with another one. - Check the CON LED on the module. The CON LED indicates if you have a signal. If the CON LED is lit, check with your provider that you are receiving a signal. For information on the various modules and their LEDs, see Appendix A: Front panel description on page 131.
! CAUTION:
CAUTION:
Hot insertion of a WAN module resets the G450. Therefore, any translation and other data that is in the running configuration but has not been saved to the startup configuration will be lost. 3. Check the ALM LED on the Avaya G450 Media Gateway chassis. If it is lit, there may be a system-wide problem.
CLI is not accessible

You can perform an NVRAM initialization using a jumper on the G450 main board. You should only use this procedure if you are unable to access the CLI, for example if the G450 resets continuously.
127
Troubleshooting
VOLTAGE ALERT:
VOLTAGE ALERT: Disconnect the G450 from the external power source before proceeding. ELECTROSTATIC ALERT: Do not touch any components on the printed circuit board except when installing or removing the bridge for the jumper pins.
1. Remove the G450 main board as described in Removing and inserting the G450 main board on page 93. 2. Locate the NVRAM init jumper (jumper J5) on the front of the G450 main board. Refer to Figure 42. Figure 42: G450 NVRAM INIT Jumper Location
3. Bridge jumper P5 (refer to Figure 42) using the bridge provided in the accessory kit. 4. Insert the G450 main board as described in Removing and inserting the G450 main board on page 93.
CLI is not accessible
5. Let the G450 operate for about 5 minutes so that it will boot and erase the current configuration. 6. Remove the G450 main board as described in Removing and inserting the G450 main board on page 93. 7. Remove the bridge.
!
Important:
Important: If you do not remove the bridge, the G450 will continue to initialize the NVRAM when it resets or is powered up.
8. Insert the G450 main board as described in Removing and inserting the G450 main board on page 93.
129
Troubleshooting
Appendix A: Front panel description

You can use the front panel of the Avaya G450 Media Gateway to:

Connect devices Add media modules View LEDs Reset the device Reset and recover from the alternate bank
The front panel of the Avaya G450 Media Gateway chassis without media modules
Figure 43: The G450 front panel ports and slots
Media module slots

The G450 has eight standard media module slots (V1 through V8). For information about the different media modules that can be housed in the media module slots, see Combination limitations on page 35 and Allocating slots on page 35.
131
Front panel description
System LEDs
Table 10: System LEDs LED MDM ALM CPU PWR Name Modem Detected Alarm CPU Power Color Green Red Green Green Indication A modem is connected to the CONSOLE or USB port An alarm is present in the system OFF A test is in progress ON Normal operation OFF No power BLINKING Problem with power ON Normal operation
USB ports
USB are standard USB ports, USB 1.1 and 2.0 compatible. The USB ports support the connection of:

USB flash drive The Multitech MultiModemUSB MT5634ZBA-USB-V92 USB modem
Console port (CON)

The Console port is a standard RJ-45 network port. Use the Console port to connect a console device or modem to the G450.
Services port (SERVICES)

The Services port is a standard RJ-45 network port. Use the Services port to connect a laptop through a 10/100 Mbps Ethernet port to the G450 for configuration purposes.
The front panel of the Avaya G450 Media Gateway chassis without media modules
Emergency Transfer Relay port (ETR)

The ETR port is a standard RJ-45 network port. Use the ETR port to connect to up to two 808A Emergency Transfer Panels. These panels provide basic telephone services in the event of system failure. For more information on Emergency Transfer Relay, see Step 6: Installing an 808A Emergency Transfer Panel and associated telephones on page 60. For information on installing the 808A Emergency Transfer Panel, see 808A Emergency Transfer Panel Installation Instructions, which ships with the Emergency Transfer Panel.
Contact Closure port (CCA)

The Contact Closure port (CCA) is wired as an RJ-14 port, but uses an RJ-45 network jack. This port is used to support the G450s Contact Closure feature. The Contact Closure feature is a controllable relay providing dry contacts for various applications. The adjunct box provides two contact closures that can be operated in either a normally closed or normally open state. The contact closures can control devices such as devices that automatically lock or unlock doors or voice recording units. The CCA port can be configured so that the connected devices can be controlled by an end device, such as a telephone. For example, a user can unlock a door by keying a sequence into a telephone keypad. For more information on Contact Closure, see Step 5: Installing the Avaya Partner Contact Closure Adjunct on page 59.
Implement the Contact Closure feature

Connect an Avaya Partner System Contact Closure Adjunct box to the CCA port.
Router ports (ETH WAN)

Each ETH WAN port is a standard RJ-45 network port. Use ETH WAN to connect a data device to the internal router through a 10/100 Mbps Ethernet port. The G450 serves as a router for the WAN.
Switch ports (ETH LAN)

Each ETH LAN port is a standard RJ-45 network port. Use ETH LAN to connect a data device to the switch through a 10/100 Mbps Ethernet port. You can connect an external LAN to ETH LAN.
133
Reset (RST) and Alternate Software Bank (ASB) buttons

RST is the reset button. ASB is the Alternate Software Bank button. The Avaya G450 Media Gateway has two firmware banks:

Bank A Bank B
Each firmware bank contains a version of the G450 firmware. These may be different versions. The purpose of this feature is to provide software redundancy. If one of the versions becomes corrupted, you can reset the G450 using the other version. This is particularly important when uploading new versions. By default, when you turn on or reset the G450, the G450 loads firmware from Bank B. This default setting can be changed by the system administrator. For example, if the G450 is configured to load firmware from Bank B, you can reset the G450 to load the firmware from Bank A instead.
Load firmware from a bank other than the default bank during startup
1. Press and hold the reset button. 2. Press and hold the ASB button. 3. Release the reset button. 4. Release the ASB button.
The front panel of the Avaya S8300 Server

The S8300 Server is a Pentium-based processor that runs on a Linux operating system. The S8300 runs Avaya Communication Manager (ACM) to provide call control services to the G450 and other Avaya gateway devices. The front panel of the S8300 includes:

10/100BaseT Fast Ethernet port (SERVICES) Two USB ports for modem connections or the USB CD-ROM drive (USB 1 and USB 2)
The front panel of the Avaya S8300 Server
Figure 44: The S8300 Server
S8300 Server ports

The S8300s 10/100BaseT Fast Ethernet port is labeled SERVICES, and is located in the center of the front panel. The S8300s two USB ports are labeled USB 1 and USB 2. They are located towards the right of the front panel.
S8300 Server port LEDs

Table 11: S8300 LEDs LED ALM TST Name Alarm Test Color Red Green Indication An alarm is present Avaya Communication Manager is running. When an S8300B is installed as an LSP, the green light shows that the server is up and waiting to provide service. This LED is lit whenever a G450, a G700, an IP telephone, or an IP console is registered with the S8300. It is off when none of these IP endpoints are registered with the S8300.
ACT
Activity
Yellow
In addition, the front panel of the S8300 has a LED labeled OK TO REMOVE, which is connected to a button labeled SHUT DOWN. This LED indicates that the S8300 has been shut down, and can be removed from the G450 chassis. Do not attempt to remove the S8300 without instructions from a specially trained technician.
135
The front panel of the Avaya MM340 media module

The MM340 media module provides one WAN access port for the connection of an E1 or T1 WAN line. Figure 45: The MM340 media module front panel
MM340 ports
The MM340s E1/T1 WAN access port is marked E1/T1. This port is located in the center of the front panel.
MM340 LEDs
Table 12: MM340 LEDs LED ALM TST ACT SIG Name Alarm Test Activity Signal Color Red Green Yellow Green Indication The module type is not the type configured in the MSG for the slot A port is being initialized or a loopback is present At least one PPP/Frame Relay session is active The physical connection is up.

The MM342 media module provides one USP WAN access port and supports the following WAN interface types:

V.35/ RS449 X.21
Figure 46: The MM342 media module front panel
MM342 ports
The MM342 contains one WAN SCSI access port.
MM342 LEDs
Table 13: MM342 LEDs LED ALM TST ACT CON Name Alarm Test Activity Connection Color Red Green Yellow Green Indication The module type is not the type configured in the MSG for the slot A port is being initialized or a loopback is present At least one PPP/Frame Relay session is active The physical connection is up
137

The MM710 T1/E1 media module terminates a T1 or E1 trunk. The MM710 has a built-in Channel Service Unit (CSU), so an external CSU is not necessary. The CSU is only used for the T1 circuit. Note: For drop and insert, an external CSU is required.
Note:
Note:
Note: The six ports in the middle of the front panel are used for testing.
MM710 ports
The MM710 contains an E1/T1 port.
MM710 LEDs
Table 14: MM710 LEDs LED ALM TST Name Alarm Test Color Red Green Indication The module type is not the type configured in the MSG for the slot Either a test is being performed on the module via the server, or the module is performing a self-test upon initial insertion 1 of 2
Table 14: MM710 LEDs (continued) LED ACT Name Activity Color Yellow Indication An E1/T1 trunk device connected to the module is in use. The light is always on if the trunk is an ISDN E1 or T1 PRI trunk, and the MM710 is not configured as the synchronization source of the G450. The light flashes at a rate of 2.8 seconds on and 0.2 seconds off if the MM710 synchronization source is configured to synchronize the G450 and the module is receiving a T1 source signal. The light flashes at a rate of 0.2 seconds on and 2.8 seconds off if the MM710 synchronization source is configured to synchronize the G450 and the T1 source is lost. The physical connection is up. 2 of 2
SIG
Signal
Green

The MM711 media module provides analog line, trunk and telephone features and functionality. The MM711 front panel includes eight universal analog ports. These ports can be used for analog telephone or fax machines, or for analog trunks. Figure 48: The MM711 media module front panel
MM711 ports
The MM711s eight universal analog ports are labeled 1 through 8.
139
MM711 LEDs
Table 15: MM711 LEDs LED ALM TST Name Alarm Test Color Red Green Indication The module type is not the type configured in the MSG for the slot Either a test is being performed on the module via the server, or the module is performing a self-test upon initial insertion A device connected to the module is in use. This can include a telephone that is off the hook.
ACT
Activity
Yellow

The MM712 DCP media module includes eight DCP telephone ports. The ports support two-wire DCP telephones. Figure 49: The MM712 media module front panel
MM712 ports
The MM712s eight DCP telephone ports are labeled 1 through 8.
MM712 LEDs
ACT
Activity
Yellow

The MM714 analog media module includes four analog telephone ports and four analog trunk ports. Note: The four analog trunk ports can not be used for analog DID trunks. Instead, the four analog line ports must be used.
Note:
MM714 ports
The MM714s four analog telephone ports are labeled 1 through 4. These ports can also be used for DID trunks. The MM714s four analog trunk ports are labeled 5 through 8.
141
MM714 LEDs
ACT
Activity
Yellow

The MM716 media module front panel has a 25-pair amphenol connector supporting 24 analog line ports. These ports can be configured as DID trunks with either wink start or immediate start. The MM716 is compatible with Avaya CM version 2.0 and higher, and G450 firmware version 25.0.0 and higher. Figure 51: The MM716 media module front panel
MM716 ports
The MM716 contains a single 25-pair amphenol connector, which can be connected by an amphenol cable to a breakout box or punch down block containing RJ-45 or RJ-11 jacks, as needed. You can attach up to 24 devices (analog telephones, trunks, modems, or fax machines) to these jacks. Table 18: 25-pair amphenol connector pinout Station port 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Cable pair White White White White White Red Red Red Red Red Black Black Black Black Black Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Blue Orange Green Brown Slate Blue Orange Green Brown Slate Blue Orange Green Brown Slate Blue Orange Green Brown Slate 1 of 2
143
Table 18: 25-pair amphenol connector pinout (continued) Station port 21 22 23 24 OPEN Cable pair Violet Violet Violet Violet Violet Blue Orange Green Brown Slate 2 of 2
MM716 LEDs
ACT
Activity
Yellow

The MM717 high density DCP media module front panel has a 25-pair amphenol connector supporting 24 Digital Communications Protocol (DCP) ports. To use the MM717 media module, connect an amphenol cable to the port and to either a breakout box or a punch down block containing RJ-45 or RJ-11 jacks, as needed. You can attach up to 24 two-wire DCP telephones to these jacks. The MM717 does not support four-wire DCP telephones.
MM717 ports
The MM717 contains a single 25-pair amphenol connector, which can be connected by an amphenol cable to a breakout box or punch down block containing RJ-45 or RJ-11 jacks, as needed. Table 20: 25-pair amphenol connector pinout Station port 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Cable pair White White White White White Red Red Red Red Red Black Black Black Black Black Yellow Blue Orange Green Brown Slate Blue Orange Green Brown Slate Blue Orange Green Brown Slate Blue 1 of 2
145
Table 20: 25-pair amphenol connector pinout (continued) Station port 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 OPEN Cable pair Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Violet Violet Violet Violet Violet Orange Green Brown Slate Blue Orange Green Brown Slate 2 of 2
MM717 LEDs
Table 21: MM717 LEDs LED ALM TST Name Alarm Test Color Red Green Indication The module type is not the type configured in the MSG for the slot Either a test is being performed on the module via the server, or the module is performing a self-test upon initial insertion A device connected to the module is in use
ACT
Activity
Yellow

The MM720 ISDN BRI media module contains eight 4-wire S/T ISDN BRI ports. These ports interface to the central office at the ISDN T reference point. Figure 53: The MM720 media module front panel
MM720 ports
The MM720s eight ISDN BRI ports are labeled 1 through 8.
MM720 LEDs
Table 22: MM720 LEDs LED ALM TST Name Alarm Test Color Red Green Indication The module type is not the type configured in the MSG for the slot Either a test is being performed on the module via the server, or the module is performing a self-test upon initial insertion A trunk connected to the module is in use. In CM 3.0 or higher, the LED could alternatively indicate that a telephone connected to the module is in use.
ACT
Activity
Yellow
147

The MM722 ISDN BRI media module provides two 4-wire S/T ISDN BRI (Basic Rate Interface) 2B+D access ports with RJ-45 jacks. Figure 54: The MM722 media module front panel
MM722 ports
The MM722 contains two ISDN BRI ports.
MM722 LEDs
Table 23: MM722 LEDs LED ALM TST Name Alarm Test Color Red Green Indication The module type is not the type configured in the MSG for the slot Either a test is being performed on the module via the server, or the module is performing a self-test upon initial insertion A trunk connected to the module is in use. In CM 3.0 or higher, the LED could alternatively indicate that a telephone connected to the module is in use.
ACT
Activity
Yellow
Appendix B: Technical specifications

This appendix provides technical specifications for the G450 and for compatible power cords.
G450 Media Gateway specifications

Table 24 provides detailed information on the physical dimensions and tolerances of the G450 Media Gateway. Table 24: G450 Media Gateway specifications Description Height Width Depth Weight of empty chassis Weight of chassis with basic configuration, including main board, power supply unit, fan tray, one DSP, and blank panels on the media module slots Ambient working temperature Operation altitude Front clearance Rear clearance Relative humidity BTU Max current Value 5.25 in (133.3 mm) 19 in (482.6 mm) 18 in (456 mm) 7.4 kg (16.5 pounds) with blank plates - 9.5 kg (21 pounds) 14 Kg (31 pounds)
0-40C up to 10000 ft (3048 m) 12 in (30 cm) 18 in (45 cm) 10-90%, non-condensing 1,780 BTU/h 6A
149
Technical specifications
Power cord specifications

Following are specifications for power cords suitable for use with the G450. For North America: The cordset must be UL Listed/CSA Certified, 16 AWG, 3-conductor (3rd wire ground), type SJT. One end is to be terminated to an IEC 60320, sheet C13 type connector rated 10A, 250V. The other end is to be terminated to either a NEMA 5-15P attachment plug for nominal 125V applications or a NEMA 6-15P attachment plug for nominal 250V applications. For Outside North America: The cord must be VDE Certified or Harmonized (HAR), rated 250V, 3-conductor (3rd wire ground), 1.0 mm2 minimum conductor size. The cord is to be terminated at one end to a VDE Certified/CE Marked IEC 60320, sheet C13 type connector rated 10A, 250V and the other end to a 3-conductor grounding type attachment plug rated at a minimum of 10A, 250V and a configuration specific for the region/country in which it will be used. The attachment plug must bear the safety agency certifications mark(s) for the region/ country of installation.
Appendix C: Running the Avaya Installation Wizard (Avaya IW)

The Avaya IW is a web-based installation wizard that is used with the Avaya G450 Media Gateway to perform initial configuration tasks and to upgrade software and firmware. The Avaya IW is designed for use with systems that contain an S8300 Server, operating in either ICC or LSP mode. You can use Avaya IW to configure the Avaya G450 Media Gateway or to upgrade an installed S8300 with new Avaya Communication Manager (CM) software and/or G450 firmware. If you have an EPW (see Obtaining the Electronic Preinstallation Worksheet (EPW) on page 24), you will be able to upload configuration parameters from the EPW to AIW as part of your AIW session.
Accessing Avaya IW
1. Connect a laptop computer to the Services port of the S8300, using a crossover cable. 2. Make sure the laptop is configured as follows:

IP Address: 192.11.13.5 NetMask: 255.255.255.252 Disable DNS Clear the primary WINS and secondary WINS IP Addresses Disable the Proxy Server in the Internet Explorer
3. Launch Internet Explorer on the laptop and type the following URL to access the S8300 Server Home Page: http://192.11.13.6. The welcome screen for Avaya Integrated Management appears. 4. Click Continue. The Logon screen for Integrated Management appears. 5. Enter the appropriate login name and password. 6. Ask a customer representative for a login name and password that the customer would like for the superuser login. If you are a business partner, you can also repeat this procedure to add the dadmin login. Note: Make sure the customer can change this login, its password, or its permissions later.
Note:
151
Running the Avaya Installation Wizard (Avaya IW)
7. From the Integrated Management main menu, select Launch Maintenance Web Interface. 8. From the navigation menu of the Maintenance Web Pages, select Security > Administrator Accounts. The Administrator Accounts screen appears. 9. Select Add Login. 10. Select Privileged Administrator and click Submit. The Administrator Logins -- Add Login: Privileged Administrator screen appears. 11. Type a login name for the account in the Login name field. 12. Verify the following:

susers appears in the Primary group field. prof18 appears in the Additional groups (profile) field. prof18 is the code for the customer superuser. /bin/bash appears in the Linux shell field. /var/home/login name appears in the Home directory field, where login name is the name you entered in step 11.
13. Skip the fields Lock this account and Date on which account is disabled-blank to ignore. 14. For the Select type of authentication option, select password. Note: Do not lock the account or set the password to be disabled. 15. Enter the password in the Enter password or key field and the Re-enter password or key field. 16. In the section Force password/key change on next login select no. 17. Click Submit. The system informs you the login is added successfully. 18. Select the Launch Installation Wizard link from the home page. The Overview screen appears:
Note:
Preliminary screens
Figure 55: The Overview screen
Preliminary screens
1. Access the Avaya IW. The first screen that appears is the Overview screen.
153
Figure 56: The Overview screen
2. Click Continue. The Avaya IW performs system auto-discovery and displays the results on the following screen:
Preliminary screens
Figure 57: The Auto Discovery Results screen
3. Click Continue. The Electronic Preinstallation Worksheet screen appears. This screen allows you to import system data from the Electronic Preinstallation Worksheet (EPW). If you import an EPW, some of the fields on the subsequent screens will be filled automatically. For information about obtaining the EPW, see Obtaining the Electronic Preinstallation Worksheet (EPW) on page 24.
155
Figure 58: The Electronic Preinstallation Worksheet screen
MGC configuration and upgrade options
Install this media server as a Main Server. This option configures the installed S8300 Server as the primary Media Gateway Controller (MGC). The primary MGC is the MGC that the G450 searches for first to provide call processing services to the G450. Install this media server as an LSP. This option configures the installed S8300 Server as a backup MGC (LSP) and to configure an external server as the primary MGC. In this case, the installed S8300 will provide backup call processing services to the G450 in case of connection failure to the primary MGC. Upgrade a previously installed media server with new software and/or media gateway firmware. This option upgrades an installed server with new Avaya Communication Manager software and/or Media Gateway firmware.
Configuring and upgrading the server

1. Click Continue from the Electronic Preinstallation Worksheet screen. The Usage Options screen appears.
Figure 59: The Usage Options screen
2. Specify which configuration processes you would like to initiate:

Install this media server as a Main Server Install this media server as an LSP Upgrade a previously installed media server with new software and/or media gateway firmware
3. Click Continue. If you are configuring a new MGC, the Confirm New Installation screen appears, as shown below. If you are upgrading an existing MGC, the Avaya Communication Manager Software screen appears. See Upgrading an existing MGC on page 160.
157
Figure 60: The Confirm New Installation screen
4. Click Continue. The Checklist screen appears displaying a list of required and optional items you need to configure the G450. For details, see Chapter 1: Before you install on page 19. Figure 61: The Checklist screen
5. Click Continue. The NVRAM INIT screen appears. Restore all factory default settings if necessary by clicking NVRAM INIT and selecting OK in the confirmation box. Figure 62: The NVRAM INIT screen
6. Click Continue. The Date/Time screen appears. Reset the G450s date and time if necessary. Figure 63: The Date/Time screen
159
7. Click Continue. The Product ID screen appears. If you are configuring a new G450, enter the product ID in the ID field and select Assign a new Product ID. Figure 64: The Product ID screen
Upgrading an existing MGC

1. Click Continue from the Product ID screen. The Avaya Communication Manager Software Upgrade screen appears. This screen enables you to upgrade the Communication Manager software on the S8300 installed in the G450.
Figure 65: The Avaya Communication Manager Software Upgrade screen
2. If you want to enable/disable the SES Co-Res server, move on to step 4. If you want to upload a new release of Avaya Communication Manager software, click Upload New Release.
161
Figure 66: The Avaya Communication Manager Upload Source screen
3. Select the source from which the Avaya Communication Manager release will be uploaded. 4. Click Continue. The SES Co-Res screen appears. This screen allows you to enable or disable a SES Co-Res server.
Figure 67: The SES Co-Res screen
5. Click Continue. The Software Update screen appears. This screen allows you to unpack Avaya Communication Manager updates.
163
Figure 68: The Software Update screen
6. If you want to unpack an Avaya Communication Manager update, check Unpack Update and browse to locate the update file on the laptop. 7. Click Continue. The Phone Message Files screen appears. Use this screen to install standard and custom phone message files that provide messages for display sets that are in the desired language format.
Figure 69: The Phone Message Files screen
8. Click Continue. The Media Server - IP Addresses screen appears. If your S8300 Server is already configured, the Avaya IW should detect and display its address information in this screen. If not, you must enter the required information.
165
Figure 70: The Media Server - IP Addresses screen
Configuring the primary controller IP addresses

1. Click Continue from the Media Server - IP Addresses screen. If you selected the Install this media server as an LSP option in the Usage Options screen, the LSP Controller screen appears. The IP addresses required vary depending on the type of primary controller. Enter the required IP address(es) for the primary controller.
Figure 71: The LSP Controller screen
2. Click Continue. From the Optional Services screen, select the services you want. Figure 72: The Optional Services screen
167
3. Click Continue. If you selected Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) in the Optional Services screen, the Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) screen appears. Enter the required information. Figure 73: The Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) screen
4. Click Continue. If you selected Domain Name Service (DNS) in the Optional Services screen, the Domain Name Server (DNS) screen appears. Enter the required information.
Figure 74: The Domain Name Server (DNS) screen
5. Click Continue. If you selected Network Time Protocol (NTP) in the Optional Services screen, the Network Time Protocol (NTP) screen appears. Select an NTP option. Figure 75: The Network Time Protocol (NTP) screen
169
6. Click Continue. If you selected Remote Access/INADS Support in the Optional Services screen, the INADS screen appears. Enter a dialup IP address for Installation and Administration System (INADS) remote support. For instructions on how to obtain the INADS IP address, see Running the Automatic Registration Tool (ART) for the RAS IP address on page 22. Figure 76: The INADS screen
7. Click Continue. The Translation Source screen appears. Use the screen to generate Avaya Communication Manager translation information, including translations for administration of extension ranges, trunk types, routes, class of service, feature access codes, trunk access codes, station button assignment, and several other parameters.
Figure 77: The Translation Source screen
8. Click Continue. The Security Files screen appears if there is a resident server on the gateway. This screen displays the installed status of the license file and enables you to install or replace the file from the laptop or LAN source. Without a valid license file, you cannot access the Avaya Communication Manager. For information on this file, see Downloading CM license and authentication files to your laptop on page 21. Note: If you selected Use this wizard to create basic translations in the Translation Source screen (Figure 77), the Security Files screen displays also the installed status of the CMs authentication file and enables you to install or replace the authentication file from the laptop or LAN source.
Note:
171
Figure 78: The Security Files screen
Gateway configuration
1. Click Continue from the Security Files screen. The IP Addresses screen appears. This screen displays the G450s ID, as well as the type of media module residing in each slot of the G450s chassis. Figure 79: The IP Addresses screen
2. Click the wrench icon corresponding to the G450 in the Action column. The PMI configuration screen appears. The IP address and subnet mask of the PMI should appear in this screen. Change this IP address and subnet mask in accordance with your system specifications. The Primary Management Interface (PMI) address is the interface used for the following management functions: - Registration of the G450 to an MGC - Sending SNMP traps - Opening telnet sessions from the G450 - Sending messages from the G450 using FTP and TFTP protocol Note: You can assign any IP interface that the MGC recognizes to be the PMI.
Note:
173
Figure 80: PMI Configuration screen
3. Click Continue. The SNMP V1 Community Strings screen appears. In the Read Only Community String field, specify a name for the SNMP read community access name to assign to the G450. In the Read Write Community String field, specify a name for the SNMP write community access name to assign to the G450. Re-enter the strings in the Re-enter Community String fields for confirmation. For information about SNMP, see Administration for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway, 03-602055.
Figure 81: The SNMP V1 Community Strings screen
4. Click Continue. The SNMP V3 screen appears. Figure 82: The SNMP V3 screen
175
5. Complete all fields if you want to configure an SNMP V3 user. Otherwise, leave all fields blank. 6. Click Continue. The Media Gateway Controller Information screen appears. Configure the list of Media Gateway Controllers (MGCs) that will provide call processing services for the G450. You must specify a primary MGC in the first IP address box. You can specify up to three backup MGCs in the optional IP address boxes, in priority order. Specify your primary MGC in accordance with the usage option you chose (see step 1). If you do not configure the S8300 installed in the G450 as the primary MGC, configure the S8300 as a backup MGC. Note: The G450 searches for the primary MGC first. If it cannot connect to the primary MGC, it searches for a backup MGC. An MGC may be the Avaya S8300 Server installed in the G450 or an external Avaya S8500 Server or Avaya S8700-series Server, or an Avaya S8300 Server installed in an external media gateway. Note: To register an S8500 or S8700-series Server as the MGC, use the IP address of the servers Control-LAN card (CLAN) rather than the IP address of the server itself.
Note:
Note:
Figure 83: The Media Gateway Controller Information screen
Firmware configuration
1. To upgrade the G450 firmware, click Continue from the Media Gateway Controller Information screen. The Firmware screen appears. This screen displays the currently installed firmware versions on the G450 and its media modules, as well as the most recent available versions.

To upgrade firmware, select the modules you want to upgrade and click Continue To upload a new firmware version from a laptop, click Upload New Firmware. The Firmware File Upload screen appears. To proceed without upgrading any firmware, clear all the boxes in the Select column and click Continue
Figure 84: The Firmware screen
2. The Firmware File Upload screen allows you to upload a new firmware file from a laptop. Enter the file path of the file you want to upload, or use the Browse button to locate the file.
177
Figure 85: The Firmware File Upload screen
3. Click Continue. The file is uploaded and the Firmware screen returns. Clear all the checkboxes in the Select column. 4. Click Continue. The Change Master Key - Optional screen appears. The master key is used to encrypt gateway secrets (passwords, etc.) in the gateway configuration file.
Figure 86: The Change Master Key - Optional screen
5. If you want to change the master key, enter the new master key passphrase and then confirm by entering it again. A new master key is generated from the passphrase. 6. Click Continue. The Gateway License screen appears.
179
Figure 87: The Gateway License screen
7. If you will need to use the VPN feature on the G450, check Install Gateway License file and fill in the remaining fields to install the gateway license file. For information on the Gateway license file, see Downloading a G450 license file to your laptop on page 21. 8. Click Continue. The Gateway Authentication screen appears.
Figure 88: The Gateway Authentication screen
9. If you have a service contract, the G450 is shipped with an authentication file. This authentication file is required for Avaya services personnel to allow them secure remote access to the gateway. Click Continue. The Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) Status screen appears. View the status of the Field Replaceable Units detected in the G450.
181
Figure 89: The FRU Status screen
10. Click Continue. The TFTP Server screen appears. Figure 90: The TFTP Server screen
11. If you want to upload configuration and firmware files for IP phones to the G450 TFTP Server, do the following: a. In the Server IP Address field, enter the IP address of the machine hosting the files that are to be uploaded. b. Select the file transfer protocol (TFTP, FTP, or SCP) you want to use to upload the files from the host machine. TFTP is selected by default. c. The use of the SCP protocol is limited to copying files of 1 MB or less. Therefore, an SCP server can be used for copying the script files, which do not exceed 128 KB, but cannot be used for copying image files. d. If you selected FTP or SCP, enter the username and password in the Username and Password fields, and re-enter the password for confirmation in the Re-enter Password field. 12. In the Select column, check any files you wish to upload. If you selected SCP as your upload protocol, the checkboxes for the phone images are disabled. If a green circled checkmark is displayed in the Uploaded column, the file has already been uploaded.
Modem configuration
1. To configure the G450 for modem use, click Continue on the TFTP Server screen. The G450 Modem Type Selection screen appears. Select the modem type you want to use. For more information on using a modem with the G450, see Chapter 4: Connecting and enabling a modem for remote access on page 63.
183
Figure 91: The G450 Modem Type Selection screen
2. Click Continue. If you selected Serial Modem, the G450 Serial Modem Configuration screen appears. If you selected USB Modem, the G450 USB Modem Configuration screen appears. If you selected None, the Country screen appears. See Telephony configuration on page 186. 3. If you selected Serial Modem, enter the required information in the G450 Serial Modem Configuration screen, then click Continue.
Figure 92: The G450 Serial Modem Configuration screen
4. If you selected USB Modem, enter the required information in the G450 USB Modem Configuration screen, then click Continue.
185
Figure 93: The G450 USB Modem Configuration screen
Telephony configuration
If you selected the option to use this wizard to create basic translations in the Translation Source screen (see step 7), the Telephony, Trunking, and Endpoints sections appear in the wizard. If you did not select the option to use this wizard to create basic translations in the Translation Source screen, skip to Alarm configuration on page 198. 1. To configure the G450s telephony parameters, click Continue in the applicable modem configuration screen. The Country screen appears. Select the country in which the installation is taking place.
Figure 94: The Country screen
2. Click Continue. The Import Custom Template screen appears. This screen allows you to configure telephony translation defaults for the Avaya IW. Figure 95: The Import Custom Template screen
187
3. Click Continue. The Call Routing screen appears. Enter the required call routing information. Figure 96: The Call Routing screen
4. Click Continue. The Extension Ranges screen appears. To add a range, click Add Extension Range and enter the starting and ending extensions for the range. If you want this range to be used to route calls over an IP trunk, select Private Networking. To add additional extension ranges, repeat these steps. When you are finished, click Continue. Figure 97: The Extension Ranges screen
189
5. Click Continue. The Import Name/Number List screen appears. This screen allows you to import an Excel file that contains user names, extension numbers, and other information. To import this file: a. Select Import the following name and number list. b. Enter the file path of the file you want to import, or use the Browse button to locate the file. c. Click Continue. Figure 98: The Import Name/Number List screen
Trunk configuration
The Trunking section appears in the wizard only if you selected the option to use this wizard to create basic translations in the Translation Source screen (see step 7). If you did not select the option to use this wizard to create basic translations in the Translation Source screen, skip to Alarm configuration on page 198. 1. To configure the G450s trunk parameters, click Continue from the Import Name/Number List screen. The Cross-Connects screen appears. If your trunk cross-connects have been completed, click Continue to proceed with trunk configuration. If your trunk cross-connects have not been completed, it is strongly recommended to exit the Avaya IW and complete all cross-connects before proceeding with trunk configuration.
Figure 99: The Cross-Connects screen
2. Click Continue. The IP Trunk List screen appears. This screen displays all IP trunks configured on the G450. To refresh this list, click Refresh. Figure 100: The IP Trunk List screen
191
3. From the IP Trunk List screen you can perform actions including: adding a trunk, modifying trunk parameters, modifying IP route configuration, displaying trunk status, and removing a trunk. To proceed to the CO Trunk List screen for configuring a trunk media module, click Continue.
Adding a trunk
1. To add a new trunk click Add IP Trunk from the IP Trunk List screen. The IP Trunk Configuration (new) screen appears. Figure 101: The IP Trunk Configuration (new) screen
2. Enter the required information in the IP Trunk Configuration (new) screen and click Continue. The IP Trunk List appears, with the new trunk included in the list of trunks. To add an additional trunk, click Add IP Trunk and repeat this step. When you are finished adding trunks, click Continue or select an action from the Actions column to modify an existing trunk.
Modifying trunk parameters

1. To modify the trunks parameters, click the configuration icon in the Actions column of the IP Trunk List screen. Figure 102: The configuration icon in the Actions column
The IP Trunk Configuration (<trunk name>) screen appears, with the trunks current parameters displayed. Figure 103: The IP Trunk Configuration screen (with current parameters)
2. Modify the trunk parameters and click Continue. The IP Trunk List appears. Select an additional action from the Actions column, or click Continue to proceed to the CO Trunk List screen. See The CO Trunk List screen on page 197.
193
Modifying IP route configuration

1. To modify the trunks IP route configuration, click the IP route icon in the Actions column of the IP Trunk List screen. Figure 104: The IP route icon in the Actions column
The IP Route Configuration screen appears. Figure 105: The IP Route Configuration screen (with extension ranges)
2. The IP Route Configuration screen displays the extension ranges available for private-network routing. Modify these ranges, if any, and click Continue. The IP Trunk List appears. Select an additional action from the Actions column, or click Continue to proceed to the CO Trunk List screen. See The CO Trunk List screen on page 197.
Displaying trunk status

1. To display the trunks operational status, click the trunk status icon in the Actions column of the IP Trunk List screen. Figure 106: The trunk status icon in the Actions column
The IP Trunk Status screen appears. Figure 107: The IP Trunk Status screen (with the operational status)
2. The IP Trunk Status screen displays the operational status of the trunk. To refresh the information, click Refresh. Otherwise, click Continue. The IP Trunk List appears. Select an additional action from the Actions column, or click Continue to proceed to the CO Trunk List screen. See The CO Trunk List screen on page 197.
195
Removing a trunk
1. To remove a trunk, click the trunks remove icon in the Actions column of the IP Trunk List screen. Figure 108: The remove trunk icon in the Action column
A message appears asking if you want to remove the trunk. Figure 109: Message to remove trunk
2. Click OK to remove the trunk. Select an additional action from the Actions column, or click Continue to proceed to the CO Trunk List screen.
Configuring a trunk media module

1. To configure a trunk media module, click Continue from the IP Trunk List screen. The CO Trunk List screen appears. Use this screen which lists trunk media modules detected in the G450 to configure a media module and run diagnostics. To configure or run diagnostics on a trunk media module, click the Actions icon for the module. Figure 110: The CO Trunk List screen
2. Select an additional action from the Actions column, or click Continue to proceed to the CO Trunk List screen.
Endpoint installation
The Endpoint section appears in the wizard only if you selected the option to use this wizard to create basic translations in the Translation Source screen (see step 7). If you did not select the option to use this wizard to create basic translations in the Translation Source screen, skip to Alarm configuration on page 198. For instructions on endpoint installation, click Continue from the CO Trunk List screen. The Endpoint Installation screen appears. You can access endpoint installation information from this screen.
197
Figure 111: The Endpoint Installation screen
Alarm configuration
1. To display modem status and configure alarms, click Continue from the Endpoint Installation screen if you selected the option to create basic translations in the Translation Source screen, or the USB modem screen otherwise. The Modem Status & Configuration screen appears. Perform the following actions from this screen:

Click Reset to reset the modem Click Refresh to re-detect and test the modem Select the appropriate modem access policy in the Modem Access area and click Continue
Figure 112: The Modem Status & Configuration screen
199
2. Click Continue. The OSS Configuration screen appears. Enter the required information from the ART tool. For information on using the ART tool, see Running the Automatic Registration Tool (ART) for the RAS IP address on page 22. Figure 113: The OSS Configuration screen
3. Click Continue. The SNMP Configuration screen appears. Check Enable SNMP Alarming if you want to enable the sending of SNMP traps to the INADS. Check the Alarm Abbreviation checkbox if you want to enable SNMP alarm abbreviation. Click Add Trap Destination to add an SNMP trap destination IP address. You can add multiple destinations. For each destination, enter the INADS IP address in the Destination IP Address field. In the Community Name field, enter an SNMP community access string. Check the Enable checkbox to enable each trap destination. Figure 114: The SNMP Configuration screen
201
Password and final screens

1. To change your password (optional) and complete the installation, click Continue from the SNMP Configuration screen. The Change Root Password screen appears. This screen allows you to change the root password on the G450. Figure 115: The Change Root Password screen
2. Click Continue. The Authentication File screen appears if there is a resident server on the gateway and if you selected Translations will be added after the installation has been completed using the SAT, ProVision, ASA or another Integrated Management tool in the Translation Source screen (Figure 77). The Authentication File screen displays the installed status of the authentication file and enables you to install or replace the file from the laptop or LAN source. Without a valid authentication file, you cannot access the Avaya Communication Manager. If the screen displays Not Installed, you must install the file now. To install a new authentication file: a. Check Install New Authentication file. b. Enter the full path of the authentication file in the File Path field.
Figure 116: The Authentication File screen
203
3. Click Continue. The Finish Up screen appears. This screen allows you to save the installation log file to your laptop. To save the installation log file: a. Click Save Log File. A dialog box appears. b. Click Save.
!
WARNING:
WARNING: Do not click Open. Clicking Open will damage the log file and may cause other problems to the Avaya IW.
c. Press <F5> to restore the Back and Continue buttons to the Finish Up screen. Figure 117: The Finish Up Screen
4. Click Continue. If you have not installed an allocation license file, a warning appears reminding you to install this file.
5. Click Continue. The Verify Gateway Installation screen appears. This screen displays a list of CLI commands that you can use to verify the G450 configuration. The following figure shows a portion of the Verify Gateway Installation screen. Figure 118: Verify Gateway Installation screen
205
6. Click Continue. The Launch Device Manager screen appears. This screen allows you to launch the Gateway Device Manager, an application that allows you to configure the WAN Router and perform other advanced configuration tasks. Figure 119: The Launch Device Manager screen
7. Click Continue. The Congratulations! screen appears to inform you that the installation is complete. To exit the Avaya IW, click Finish. Figure 120: The Congratulations! screen
The Exit AIW screen appears. Figure 121: The Exit AIW screen
207
Appendix D: Running the Gateway Installation Wizard (GIW)

If you did not install an S8300 in the G450, you can use the Gateway Installation Wizard (GIW) to perform the configurations required to complete the installation. GIW prompts you for all the configurations required to complete the installation. If you have an EPW (see Obtaining the Electronic Preinstallation Worksheet (EPW) on page 24), you will be able to upload configuration parameters from the EPW to GIW as part of your GIW session. GIW includes the option to enable a modem connected to the S8300. This appendix describes how to run GIW, and how to connect and test a modem if you choose to enable the modem.
Running the Gateway Installation Wizard (GIW)

Running the GIW performs a basic configuration of the G450. The configuration can include:

Configuring the Primary Management Interface (PMI) Setting SNMP communities and trap destinations Upgrading firmware Enabling a modem on the G450
Performing a basic configuration of the G450

1. Prepare a PC with a CD-ROM drive and a TFTP server on the network. This may be needed for installing software and firmware upgrades. Note: When uploading firmware from the S8300 using TFTP, you may need to enable TFTP service in the Set LAN Security parameters of your web server. Note: Firmware upgrades for the G450 and media modules can either be installed from CD or downloaded from the Web. For information about downloading firmware upgrades from the Web to the TFTP server, see Downloading G450 firmware files to a local TFTP server on page 108.
Note:
Note:
209
2. Download GIW (Gateway Installation Wizard) from the Avaya Support website (support.avaya.com/avayaiw) to the laptop computer. The laptop should be running Windows 2000 or Windows XP to support GIW. 3. Plug one end of the provided flat RJ-45 to RJ-45 cable into the provided DB-9 adapter. 4. Plug the RJ-45 connector at the other end of the cable into the CON port of the G450. 5. Plug the DB-9 end of the flat cable into the COM port of the laptop computer. 6. From your laptop computer, double-click the GIW icon to run GIW. The Overview screen appears. 7. Click Continue. The COM Port Selection screen appears. Figure 122: COM Port Selection screen
10. Select Continue the installation using this wizard. 11. Click Continue. The Initializing the Components screen appears.
211
Figure 124: Initializing the Components screen
12. Check Initialize the Gateway Installation Session. 13. Click Continue. The Import Electronic Preinstallation Worksheet screen appears.
Figure 125: The Import Electronic Preinstallation Worksheet screen
14. If you have an EPW on your laptop (see Obtaining the Electronic Preinstallation Worksheet (EPW) on page 24), check Import EPW. If you are using GIW to only upgrade files, verify that Import EPW is unchecked. 15. Browse to the EPW file on your laptop. Any values that are included in the EPW will appear as default values from now on as you move through this wizard. 16. Click Continue. The IP Addresses screen appears.
213
Figure 126: The IP Addresses screen
The IP Addresses screen displays information about the G450 automatically detected, such as what media modules are installed in the media modules slots. 17. If you are using GIW only to upgrade firmware, continue with step 30. 18. Click in the Action column. The PMI screen appears.
Figure 127: The PMI screen
19. In the PMI screen, specify the details of the Primary Management Interface (PMI) for the G450. The PMI is used as the IP address of the G450 for specific management functions. If you do not know which interface to designate as the PMI, check with your project manager. 20. Click Continue. The SNMP V1 screen appears.
215
Figure 128: The SNMP V1 screen
21. In the SNMP V1 screen, specify SNMP V1 community strings for Read Only and Read Write access. 22. Click Continue. The SNMP V3 screen appears.
Figure 129: The SNMP V3 screen
23. If you want to configure an SNMP V3 user on the G450: a. In the User Name field, enter a string of up to 32 characters representing the SNMP V3 user. b. In the Authentication Protocol field, select the authentication protocol by which the SNMP V3 user should be authenticated (SHA1 or MD5). c. In the Authentication Password field, enter a string of between 8 and 64 characters specifying the users authentication password. The authentication password is transformed using the authentication protocol and the SNMP engine ID to create an authentication key. d. In the Re-enter Authentication Password field, enter the authentication password again for verification. e. In the Privacy Password field, enter a string of between 8 and 64 characters specifying the SNMP V3 users privacy password. f. In the Re-enter Privacy Password field, enter the privacy password again for verification. 24. Click Continue. The IP Addresses - Media Gateway Controller List screen appears.
217
Figure 130: The IP Addresses - Media Gateway Controller List screen
25. In the Media Gateway Controller List screen, specify the IP address of the primary Media Gateway Controller (MGC) in the first IP address box. 26. Specify the IP addresses of up to three additional MGCs, optionally, in the subsequent boxes. 27. Specify Transition Point information. 28. Click Ping Test to test the accessibility of each MGC. 29. Click Continue. You return to the IP addresses screen. 30. Click Continue. The Firmware screen appears.
Figure 131: The Firmware screen
31. Upload any firmware upgrades you need to install to your TFTP server. 32. In the TFTP Address field, enter the address of your TFTP server. 33. In the TFTP Directory field, enter the name of the directory on the TFTP server in which the upgrade files are located. 34. In the table, check the Select box for all firmware components you want to upgrade. The current version of each component is listed to help you confirm the need for upgrade. 35. Enter the file name of each firmware upgrade file you want to install in each line of the table where you checked the Select box. 36. Click Continue. The firmware is upgraded and the Change Master Key - Optional screen appears. The master key is used to encrypt gateway secrets (passwords, etc.) in the gateway configuration file.
219
Figure 132: The Change Master Key - Optional screen
37. If you want to change the master key, enter the new master key passphrase and then confirm by entering it again. A new master key is generated from the passphrase. 38. Click Continue. The Gateway License screen appears.
Figure 133: The Gateway License screen
39. If you will need to use the VPN feature on the G450, check Install Gateway License File and fill in the remaining fields to install the gateway license file. For information on the Gateway license file, see Downloading a G450 license file to your laptop on page 21. 40. Click Continue. The Gateway Authentication screen appears.
221
Figure 134: The Gateway Authentication screen
41. If you have a service contract, the G450 is shipped with an authentication file. This authentication file is required for Avaya services personnel to allow them secure remote access to the gateway. Click Continue. The Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) Status screen appears. View the status of the Field Replaceable Units detected in the G450.
Figure 135: The Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) Status screen
42. Click Continue. The TFTP Server screen appears. The TFTP Server screen enables you to upload firmware and configuration files for IP phone upgrades to the G450 TFTP server.
223
Figure 136: The TFTP Server screen - part 1
43. If you want to upload configuration and firmware files for IP phones to the G450 TFTP Server, do the following: a. In the Server IP Address field, enter the IP address of the machine hosting the files that are to be uploaded. b. Select the file transfer protocol (TFTP, FTP, or SCP) you want to use to upload the files from the host machine. TFTP is selected by default. The use of the SCP protocol is limited to copying files of 1 MB or less. Therefore, an SCP server can be used for copying the script files, which do not exceed 128 KB, but cannot be used for copying image files. c. If you selected FTP or SCP, enter the username and password in the Username and Password fields, and re-enter the password for confirmation in the Re-enter Password field. 44. Click Continue.
Figure 137: The TFTP Server screen - part 2
45. In the Select column, check any files you wish to upload. Note: If you selected SCP as your upload protocol, the checkboxes for the phone images are disabled. If a green circled checkmark is displayed in the Uploaded column, the file has already been uploaded. 46. Click Continue. The files are uploaded and the G450 Modem Type Selection screen appears. If you are using GIW only to upgrade firmware, click Continue until you reach the Finish Up screen. Go to step 55.
Note:
225
Figure 138: The G450 Modem Type Selection screen
47. If you do not need to connect a modem to the G450, select None. 48. If you do need to connect a modem to the G450, select the type of modem you want to connect. 49. Click Continue. The appropriate modem configuration screen appears.
Figure 139: The G450 Serial Modem Configuration screen
227
Figure 140: G450 USB Modem Configuration screen
50. In the PPP IP Address field, enter the RAS IP address of the modem obtained using the ART tool. See Running the Automatic Registration Tool (ART) for the RAS IP address on page 22. 51. Enter the PPP Subnet Mask. 52. Select the authentication method:
53. Click Continue. The Change Root Password screen appears.
Figure 141: The Change Root Password screen
54. If you would like to change the password on the G450 Media Gateway, enter the current password in the Current Password field, enter a new password in the New Password field, and re-enter the new password in the Confirm New Password field. 55. Click Continue. The Finish Up screen appears.
229
Figure 142: The Finish Up screen
Follow the on-screen instructions if you want to save the installation log file. Further configurations, as described in this screen, can now be performed either remotely, via a modem that you enabled with GIW, or locally.
Connect a modem, if necessary

If you enabled a serial or USB modem on the G450 during your GIW session, you can now connect the modem.
Connecting a serial modem

1. Connect the serial modem to a working telephone line. 2. Connect the provided DB-25 adapter to the modem. 3. Disconnect the flat cable from the COM port of the laptop computer. 4. Connect the flat cable to the DB-25 connector on the modem.
Test the modem connection
Connecting a USB modem

1. Connect a USB modem to a working telephone line. Note: The MultiTech model MT5634ZBA-USB USB modem is the only USB modem supported by the G450. 2. Connect one end of a USB cable to the modem. 3. Connect the other end of the USB cable to a USB port on the G450 front panel.
Note:
Test the modem connection

If the modem is successfully initialized, the MDM LED on the G450 front panel lights.
Testing the modem

If you connected a modem, verify that the MDM LED is lit, and then dial into the modem to check that you can authenticate to the modem.
231
Appendix E: Power supplies and adjunct systems

This appendix provides information and wiring examples of installation procedures for various telephone and console power supplies. In addition, you may need to install one or more adjunct systems or devices. Follow the instructions in:

IA770 INTUITY AUDIX messaging application on page 237 INTUITY AUDIX LX messaging system on page 239 Call center on page 239 Uninterruptible power supply (UPS) on page 242 Terminal server installation on page 245 Call Detail Recording (CDR) on page 258 Reliable Data Transport Tool (RDTT) package on page 261 Printers on page 262 DS1/T1 CPE loopback jack on page 263 External modems on page 278 Busy tone disconnect equipment for non-U.S. installations on page 280 Music-on-hold on page 281 Paging and announcement equipment on page 285 Adjunct Information Sources on page 286
For these adjunct systems, consult the documentation specific to the system for complete installation instructions. Your planning documentation specifies the equipment you will be installing.
!
WARNING:
WARNING: To reduce the risk of fire, use only 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cords when installing telephones or adjuncts.
233
Power supplies and adjunct systems
Typical adjunct power connections

The 400B2 adapter is convenient for connecting local -48 VDC power to a modular plug. See Figure 143. Each port network can provide power for up to three attendant consoles. This source of power is preferred for the attendant consoles because it has the same battery backup as the G450 Media Gateway. Refer to Documentation for Avaya Communication Manager, Media Gateways and Servers CD, 03-300151, for detailed power supply information and installation procedures. Figure 143: 400B2 Adapter Connecting to a Modular Plug
r7 4 9 4 2 8K L C0 6 0 3 9 6
Figure notes: 1. Flush-Mounted Information Outlet 2. Surface-Mounted Information Outlet 3. To Individual Power Unit 4. 400B2 Adapter 5. To Telephone 6. Destination Service Access Point (DSAP) Power Cord
Typical adjunct power connections end-to-end
Typical adjunct power connections end-to-end

Figure 144 shows typical connection locations for adjunct power. Figure 144: Example Adjunct Power Connections
13 2 1 4 5 3 7 9 11 6 8 10 12
14
14
cydmapwr EWS 052898
Figure notes: 1. Typical display telephone 2. Individual power supply (Such as 1151B/ C) (Not used if item 14 is used) 3. 400B2 adapter 4. Information outlet (modular jack) 5. 4-pair D-Inside Wire (DIW) cable 6. Satellite site or adapter location 7. 25-pair D-Inside Wire (DIW) cable 8. Station side of MDF 9. 100P6A patch cord or jumpers 10. System side of MDF 11. 25-pair cable to digital line modular jack 12. Equipment room 13. Satellite location 14. Bulk power supply. Install at satellite location or equipment room (not both).
Auxiliary power for an attendant console

The nonessential functions of an attendant console and its optional 26A1 or 24A1 selector console derive power from an auxiliary power source. Provide auxiliary power for an attendant console through this cable so the console remains fully operational during short power outages. Note: Only 1 console can derive auxiliary power from the system and through the auxiliary cable located in the trunk/auxiliary field.
Note:
A consoles maximum distance from its auxiliary power source is:
800 ft (244 m) for a 302A1
235
350 ft (107 m) for a 301B1 and 302D
An attendant console can also derive auxiliary power from:

Individual 1151B/C or 1151B2/C2 power supply MSP-1 power supply 258A-type adapters Bulk power supplies
Local and Phantom Power

An attendant consoles maximum distance from the system is limited. See Table 25. Table 25: Attendant Console Cabling Distances Enhanced Attendant Console (302D) With Selector Console Phantom powered Locally powered Without Selector Console Phantom powered Locally powered 1400 5000 427 1524 900 3400 274 1037 800 5000 244 1524 500 3400 152 1037 24 AWG Wire (0.26 mm2) Feet Meters 26 AWG Wire (0.14 mm2) Feet Meters
IA770 INTUITY AUDIX messaging application
IA770 INTUITY AUDIX messaging application

The IA770 INTUITY AUDIX Messaging Application runs on a G450 Media Gateway controlled by an S8300 Server. Without the need for additional hardware, IA770 INTUITY AUDIX software processes touchtones, converts messages to the G.711 format, and converts text to speech. Note: For complete information on IA770 INTUITY AUDIX Installations, see Avaya IA770 INTUITY AUDIX Messaging, Release 3.0, Installation, Upgrades, and Troubleshooting, 11-300532.
Note:
! CAUTION:
CAUTION:
IA770 INTUITY AUDIX Messaging processes messages using the G.711 codec only. Therefore, ensure that a codec set exists that uses only the G.711 codec. Then, assign that codec set to a network region. And, finally, assign that network region to the AUDIX signaling group that is linked to the IA770 INTUITY AUDIX Messaging trunk group.
Shared resources of IA 770 coresidency

An IA770 uses many resources of the S8300 Server and the media gateway where it resides. The following list outlines the S8300s shared resources used by the IA770 INTUITY AUDIX system:

Hardware for data storage and retrieval TFTP server for: - Downloading and updating the license file for feature activation - Backing up and restoring data over a LAN or a WAN, including translations and messages - Updating and upgrading software IP address for administration access General Alarm Manager for alarm display Web interface to start and stop the system
The IA770 system also shares the same switch-tone parameters established for the S8300 Server. With the software-only version of the IA770 system that is currently sold, the S8300 Server handles switch tones on behalf of the IA770 system and passes on the control information to the IA770 system using QSIG signaling. With the IA770 system that uses a CWY1 board, the installer or administrator must set IA770 parameters to match those of the S8300 Server.
237
Where is the IA770 location and software

IA770 INTUITY AUDIX messaging is a software-only version of INTUITY AUDIX messaging that uses a QSIG-MWI H.323 virtual trunk for communication between the Communication Manager and IA770 software. The INTUITY AUDIX system software is loaded directly onto the S8300 hard drive. Note: For upgrades only, a G450 Media Gateway that previously used a CWY1 board can continue to use the CWY1 board with IA770 INTUITY AUDIX software. However, the CWY1 board is no longer available for new systems.
Note:
Using an AUDIX trunk group as well as an AUDIX hunt group for new systems
For new systems, an H.323 virtual trunk integration must be established. The virtual trunk group, and signaling group, setup is handled automatically when you install IA770 INTUITY AUDIX Messaging with the Avaya Installation Wizard. Otherwise, you must administer the trunk group, its signaling group, and the assigned network region and IP codec set with Communication Manager once the software is installed. The number of trunks assigned to the trunk group can be either 3, 6, or 12. The use of trunks replaces the need for voice ports in the hunt group. However, an INTUITY AUDIX hunt group must still be defined. The hunt group setup is also handled automatically when you install IA770 INTUITY AUDIX Messaging with the Avaya Installation Wizard. Otherwise, you must administer the hunt group using Communication Manager. Other switch administration tasks that are associated with proper hunt group functions, such as creating COR, COS, and coverage paths, are also required.
IA770 INTUITY AUDIX installations and S8300 upgrades for IA770 INTUITY AUDIX
The INTUITY AUDIX software must be installed or upgraded at the same time as the S8300 Communication Manager software load (the .rpm files). The IA770 software is delivered on the Communication Manager software distribution CD. The Communication Manager installation tools install IA770 INTUITY AUDIX automatically. For complete information on IA770 INTUITY AUDIX Installations Avaya IA770 INTUITY AUDIX Messaging, Release 3.0, Installation, Upgrades, and Troubleshooting, 11-300532.
INTUITY AUDIX LX messaging system
INTUITY AUDIX LX messaging system

The process of integrating an INTUITY AUDIX LX system with an Avaya S8300 Server involves a series of tasks to prepare the switch to work with the INTUITY AUDIX LX system. The procedures for this process are fully documented in INTUITY AUDIX LX Release 1.0 Documentation, 585-313-818. The information is contained in a document with the title INTUITY AUDIX LX Release 1.0 LAN Integration with S8300 and DEFINITY Systems.
Call center
The S8300 Server provides an excellent solution for a small call center. The S8300 Server with the G450 Media Gateway supports the following call center capabilities:
All three Avaya call center packages: - Avaya Call Center Basic - Avaya Call Center Deluxe - Avaya Call Center Elite Up to 450 agents A maximum of 16 ASAI links Avaya G450 announcement software
About Avaya G450 announcement software

Voice announcements are used in a call center environment to announce delays, direct customers to different departments, and entertain and inform calling parties. The announcement capability is standard and comes co-resident on the G450. The G450 announcement software has many of the functions of the TN2501AP VAL circuit pack. See Table 26 for differences between the Avaya G450 Announcement software and the VAL circuit pack. For more information on Avaya G450 Announcement software, see the
239
Administrator Guide for Avaya Communication Manager, 03-300509, Chapter 13, "Managing Announcements". Table 26: Comparison between the G450 Announcement software and the VAL circuit pack Area description Requires hardware Maximum storage time Concurrent calls per announcement TN2501AP (VAL) circuit pack Yes Up to 60 minutes at 64Kbps sample rate 50 when using a DEFINITY Server SI or DEFINITY Server CSI 1,000 when using the DEFINITY Server R, S8500, or S8700-series Server Yes Avaya G450 announcement software No Up to 45 minutes at 64Kbps uncompressed speech 1,000
Backup and restore over LAN Recording method File portability to multiple DEFINITY or Avaya G450 Media Gateways Playback quality Backup speed
Yes
Use PC or telephone Yes
Use PC or telephone Yes
Toll quality 2.6 seconds for each 60 seconds of announcement time High Yes
Toll quality 2.6 seconds for each 60 seconds of announcement time High Yes 1 of 2
Reliability Firmware downloadable
Call center
Table 26: Comparison between the G450 Announcement software and the VAL circuit pack (continued) Area description Number of boards per system TN2501AP (VAL) circuit pack 5 on the DEFINITY CSI and DEFINITY SI 10 on the DEFINITY R and S8500 or S8700-series Server 32 Avaya G450 announcement software 10 per configuration
Number of announcement ports Announcements per board Maximum number of announcements in a configuration Format Sample bits Sample rate Channels
64
1024 128 DEFINITY Server CSI or DEFINITY Server Si 1,000 DEFINITY Server R 3,000 S8500, or S8700-series Server CCITT A-law or u-law 8 8,000 KHz Mono
256 3,000 over multiple G450 Media Gateways
CCITT A-law or u-law 8 8,000 KHz Mono 2 of 2
241
Uninterruptible power supply (UPS)

The Avaya 1000-2000 VA online Uninterruptible power systems (UPSs) provide power protection for telecommunications systems and equipment. Avaya UPSs are a cost-effective measure to avoid costly downtime. The Avaya UPS provides complete isolation from power disturbances to protect customers data and equipment. It can keep the phones up and ensure network reliability, but it also provides customizable alarm and monitoring capabilities. Avaya online UPSs feature:

Isolation of connected equipment from all incoming power problems Doubled battery service life and advanced warning of the end of useful battery life with Advanced Battery Management (ABM) technology Prolonged backup time with Extended Battery Modules (EBMs) Conditioned incoming power without depleting the battery to preserve battery power for complete power outages Adapted to rack-mount and standalone tower applications with two-in-one form factor Standard RS-232 communications port Standard DEFINITY alarm contacts Six foot communications cable included Web/SNMP card to add direct control and monitoring capabilities in SNMP-based networks and via Web browsers (Optional for all models except select 1000 VA UPS)
UPS models
Avaya Equipment to protect (total load of 750VA | 523 Watts) Holdover Time (mins) 6 8 16 8 UPS 750 VA Line-interactive Rackmount UPS, RoHS 1000 VA Line-interactive Rackmount UPS, RoHS 1440 VA Line-interactive Rackmount UPS, RoHS 1000 VA Online UPS with Web/SNMP Card UPS Capacity used 100.0% 75.0% 52.1% 75.0% SAP 700427073 700427081 700427099 700290273 1 of 2
Uninterruptible power supply (UPS)
Avaya Equipment to protect (total load of 750VA | 523 Watts) Holdover Time (mins) 24 68 UPS 1500 VA Online UPS w/Web card + Rail Kit 1000 VA Online UPS with Web/SNMP Card and 1 EBM 1500 VA Online UPS w/1 EBM, Web card, 4-post Rail 1000 VA Online UPS with Web/SNMP Card and 2 EBM 1500 VA Online UPS w/2 EBM, Web card, 4-post Rail 1500VA Online UPS w/3 EBM, Web card, 4-post Rail 1500VA Online UPS w/4 EBM, Web card, 4-post Rail 3000 VA Online UPS with 4 EBM 1500 VA Online UPS w/1 XBU48 and Web/ SNMP Card UPS Capacity used 50.0% 75.0% SAP 194384 (1) 700290273 (1) 700404411 (1) 194384 (1) 700404429 (1) 700290273 (2) 700404411 (1) 194384 (2) 700404429 (1) 194384 (3) 700404429 (1) 194384 (4) 700404429 (1) 181588 (4) 700404577 (1) 194384 (1) 700404486 2 of 2 Battery runtimes (in minutes)1 1000 VA Model Load 200 VA / 140 W 400 VA / 280 W 700 VA / 490 W Std Internal Batteries 37 19 9 (1) 24V EBM 271 142 72 (2) 24V EBMs 546 278 156 1 of 2
89
50.0%
143
75.0%
167
50.0%
253
50.0%
344
50.0%
360 720
25.0% 50.0%
243
Battery runtimes (in minutes)1 1000 VA Model Load 850 VA / 595 W 1000 VA / 700 W Std Internal Batteries 6 5 (1) 24V EBM 59 48 (2) 24V EBMs 124 104 2 of 2
1. This table provides typical information. Runtimes are approximate and may vary with equipment, configuration, battery age, temperature, etc.
Full Details on these units can be found in Hardware Description and Reference for Avaya Communication Manager, 555-245-207. You can also go online to find out the latest details about UPS technology at http://www.avayaups.com/avaya/default.asp.
Terminal server installation

This section provides information on connecting adjunct equipment to a G450 Media Gateway with an S8300 Server using a terminal server (see Figure 145). Avaya supports the IOLAN+ 104 terminal server. Any device that does not support a direct TCP/IP connection, but that does support an RS-232 interface, can connect through a terminal server. System printers and some CDR devices use RS-232 connections and can connect through a terminal server. You can connect up to four adjuncts through one terminal server. Figure 145: Switch-to-adjunct LAN connectivity through a terminal server
1 6
LAN
3
1 2 3 4
4
DATA CONNECTIONS ONLY - NOT FOR TELECOM USE
5
10BASE-T 5VDC
cydfadj KLC 091302
Figure notes: 1. switch 2. IP connection on an S8300/G450 configuration 3. 10/100Base-T Hub (optional) 4. terminal server 5. serial port 6. CDR adjunct
245
Equipment required for installing and administering the terminal server

Make sure you have all the equipment on site before the installation. You must have the hardware listed in Table 27. Table 27: Required equipment Comcode 700015084 NA NA NA 405369042 846943306 or 104154414 NA 102631413 NA NA NA Description 700409519 CUST SOL TERM SRVR 4PT RHS RJ45-to-DB25 connector for IOLAN+ (supplied with 700015084) DB25-to-DB9 connector for PC COM port RS-232 Null modem (if needed for PC or printer connectivity) Male/female adapter (if necessary) 6-inch RJ45 crossover cord, or 10/100Base-T auto-sensing LAN hub or router 259A adapter, or CAT5 cross connect hardware and connecting blocks RJ45 UTP Category 5 modular cords 451A in-line RJ45 adapters, as needed to connect modular cords together Qty 1 4 1 1 or more 1 or more 1 1 1 Supplier Avaya Avaya Avaya Avaya Avaya Avaya Customer Avaya Customer Customer
12
You also need a computer (laptop) with the HyperTerminal software program for the initial administration of the IOLAN+ and to set up the ports.
What are the distance limits for the terminal server

The distance limit from the switch to the LAN hub is 328 ft (100 meters). The distance limit from the LAN hub to the terminal server is 328 ft (100 meters). If installed, the limit from the terminal server to the adjunct is 50 ft (15 meters). However, to achieve greater distance limits, the switchs LAN hub/router may be connected to a WAN and the hub/router for the terminal server also connected to the same WAN.
How is the terminal server cabling connected

Figure 146 shows the connection between the terminal server port and a call accounting system. Figure 146: Stand-alone call accounting system link using a terminal server
259A Adapter, 356A Adapter (Jack #1), or 258B Adapter (Jack #1) Standalone Call Accounting
Switch
Terminal Server
C-LAN RJ45 Cat 5 Modular Cord AC Power Hub or Router RJ45 Cat 5 Modular Cord
M25A or M25B RS232 Cable
Call Accounting Port
clan2gca.cdr
328 ft max (100 m)
328 ft max (100 m)
50 Ft. Maximum
Demarcation Point
Connecting the IOLAN+ to the adjunct and the LAN

Connect the adjunct to the IOLAN+, using the RJ45-to-DB25 cable and the null modem. You can use a male/female adapter (see Figure 147).
247
Figure 147: Connecting an adjunct to the IOLAN+
2
cydfrcon KLC 021201
5 7 5 4
7
DATA CONNECTIONS ONLY - NOT FOR TELECOM USE
3
10BASE-T 5VDC
Figure notes: 1. 2. 3. 4. IP connection on an S8300/G450 Local area network (LAN) IOLAN+ 104 terminal server Adjunct (system management terminal or a system printer, for example) 5. Null modem 6. PC or laptop (for initial administration) 7. DB25-to-RJ45 cable 8. DB25-to-DB9 cable
Follow these typical steps: Note: Depending on the adjuncts connections, you may not need all of these pieces. 1. Connect the null modem adapter to COM1 port on the adjunct. Note: The null modem is an important element in this setup. Without it, data may not transfer correctly. 2. Connect the other end of the null modem adapter to the DB25 to RJ-45 cable. 3. Connect the RJ-45 end to any port on the IOLAN+.
Note:
Note:
Administering the IOLAN+

To administer the IOLAN+ the first time, you must connect a PC or laptop to the RS-232 Port 1 on the IOLAN+ terminal server. Follow these typical steps: 1. Connecting the IOLAN+ on page 249 2. Setting up HyperTerminal on the computer on page 249 3. Administering the IOLAN+ the first time on page 249
4. Rebooting the IOLAN+ on page 252 Note: Depending on the computers COM port, you may not need all of these pieces.
Note:
Connecting the IOLAN+

1. Connect the DB9 end of the DB9-to-DB25 cable to the COM port on the PC or laptop. 2. Connect the DB25 end to the null modem adapter. 3. Connect the other end of the null modem adapter to the DB25 to RJ-45 cable. 4. Connect the RJ-45 end to Port 1 of the IOLAN+. 5. Before beginning the initial administration, make sure you have the following information:

New IP address and subnet mask for IOLAN+ Host name for IOLAN+ IP address of S8300 Server Ethernet interface Port number of S8300 Server Ethernet interface where adjunct connects
Use the HyperTerminal software program that comes with Windows 95/98/NT/2000 to administer the IOLAN+.
Setting up HyperTerminal on the computer

1. Open HyperTerminal. 2. Click the File > Properties > Connect tab. a. In the Connect using: field, select COM n, where n is the communication port your computer is using. 3. Click CONFIGURE a. Set the bits per second field to 9600. b. Set the Flow control field to Hardware. 4. Click OK. 5. Press ENTER to get the login prompt.
Administering the IOLAN+ the first time

1. At the login prompt type any text and press ENTER.
249
2. At the second prompt type set term ansi and press ENTER to view the Connections Menu.
Name: port 2 CONNECTIONS MENU Terminal: 2
Connection 1 2 3 4
Host *** *** *** *** FREE FREE FREE FREE ** ** ** ** === Commands === | Telnet ^T| | Rlogin ^R| | Port ^P| | Admin mode ^A| | CLI | | Lock | | Logout ^D| ================
___________________________________________________________________________ IOLAN PLUS v4.02.00 a CDi iolan
3. Under Connection select Port 1 (the port to which the adjunct is connected) and press ENTER to access the Commands menu. 4. Select Admin mode > Password and press ENTER.
Name: port 2 ADMINISTRATION MENU Terminal: 2
gateway host line password port quit server stats
Examine/modify gateway table. Examine/modify host table. Terminal configuration organised by line. Specify password to allow modification of menu items. Terminal configuration organised by port. Return to connections menu. Examine/modify Server parameters. Examine Server statistics.
Password
___________________________________________________________________________
IOLAN PLUS v4.02.00 a CDi
iolan-st
5. Type iolan, the default password, and press ENTER. The Administration Menu changes, offering more options.
6. Select server and press ENTER to view the Server Configuration menu.
** Administrator ** SERVER CONFIGURATION Terminal: 2
Name [iolan ] Debug mode [0 ] IP address [123.45.67.89 ] Subnet mask [222.222.0.0 ] Ethernet address [00:80:d4:03:11:cd] Ethernet interface [AUTO] Language [English ] Identification [ ] Lock [Disabled] Password limit [5 ] CR to initiate [No ] SNAP encoding [Disabled] Boot host [ ] Boot diagnostics [Enabled ] Boot file [ ] Init file [ ] MOTD file [ ] Domain name [ ] Name server [ ] NS Port [53 ] WINS server [ ] ___________________________________________________________________________ Name used for prompts and message on bottom right of screen. IOLAN PLUS v4.02.00 a CDi iolan
7. Fill in the following fields with information appropriate to your network. Leave the default settings for the other fields.

Name: IP address: (for IOLAN+) Subnet mask:
8. Press ENTER and select Save & Exit to effect the changes. You must reboot the server any time you change an IP address or Local Port value.
251
Rebooting the IOLAN+

1. Press ENTER to view the Administration Menu.
** Administrator ** ADMINISTRATION MENU Terminal: 2
access change gateway host kill line port quit reboot server stats trap
Remote System Access (PPP). Change login and/or admin password. Examine/modify gateway table. Examine/modify host table. Kill TCP connections on serial line. Terminal configuration organised by line. Terminal configuration organised by port. Return to connections menu. Reboot Server. Examine/modify Server parameters. Examine Server statistics. Examine/modify SNMP Trap parameters.
Port
[2
____________________________________________________________________________
iolan
Note:
Note: The following steps re-initialize the IOLAN+ so it knows it's connected to the LAN through its IP address. 2. Select reboot and press ENTER. 3. Press the space bar to restart the IOLAN+.
Navigating the IOLAN+ terminal server

Refer to the IOLAN+ user guide for details. In general, you must:

Use the arrow keys to move to a menu item Use the TAB key to move from field to field horizontally Use the ENTER key to choose an item
Administering the gateway

You need to administer the gateway only if the S8300 Server and IOLAN+ are not in the same subnet. Note: If the S8300 Server and IOLAN+ are in the same subnet, skip this procedure. 1. Select Admin mode > Password and press ENTER. 2. Type iolan and press ENTER. 3. Select gateway to access the Gateway menu. 4. Fill in the following fields for Entry 1:

Note:
Destination: S8300 Server IP address Gateway: Gateway address Netmask: Subnet mask
Note:
Note: The following steps re-initialize the IOLAN+ so it knows it's connected to the LAN through your gateway. 5. Select reboot and press ENTER. 6. Press the space bar to restart the IOLAN+.
Administering an IOLAN+ port

Use this procedure when connecting an adjunct or serial COM port on a PC directly (locally) to the IOLAN+ (see Figure 147: Connecting an adjunct to the IOLAN+ on page 248). 1. Select Admin mode > Password and press ENTER. 2. Type iolan and press ENTER. 3. Select port and press ENTER.
253
4. Type port number and press ENTER to view the Port Setup Menu where port number is the port that the adjunct connects to.
** Administrator ** Hardware Speed [9600 ] Parity [None] Bit [8] Stop [1 ] Break [Disabled] Monitor DSR [Yes ] Monitor DCD [No ] User Name [port 2 ] Terminal type [undef ] TERM [ ] Video pages [0] CLI/Menu [CLI] Reset Term [No ] PORT SETUP MENU Flow ctrl Flow ctrl [xon/xoff] Input Flow [Enabled ] Output Flow [Enabled ] IP Addresses Src [ Dst [ Terminal: 2 Keys Hot Quit Del Echo Mask [^]] [^@] [^@] [^@] [ Intr Kill Sess [^C] [^U] [^@]
] ]
Options Keepalive [No ] Rlogin/Telnet [Telnet] Debug options [No ] Map CR to CR LF [No ] Hex data [No ] Secure [No ] MOTD [No ]
Access Access [Remote ] Authentication [None ] Mode [Raw ] Connection [None ] Host [ ] Remote Port [0 ] Local Port [5101]
________________________________________________________________________________
iolan
5. Fill in the following fields. Leave the default settings for the other fields.

Speed: 9600 Monitor DSR: Yes Monitor DCD: No Name: port number or other descriptive name Terminal type: undef CLI/Menu: CLI Reset Term: No Flow ctrl: xon/xoff IP addresses: leave blank Mask: leave blank Access: Remote Authentication: None Mode: Raw Connection: None
Host: leave blank or enter S8300 Server IP Address Remote Port: 0 Local Port: must match the value of Remote Port on the IP Services screen of the Communication Manager software
6. Press ENTER and select Save & Exit to effect the changes. 7. Press ENTER again to view the Administration Menu. 8. Select kill to disable the port connection. 9. Repeat the steps for each additional port you want to administer. 10. When administration is complete, from the Connections Menu, select logout (or press Ctrl D). 11. Close HyperTerminal. At this point, you have established a connection path from the adjunct through the IOLAN+ to the S8300 Server.
Testing connectivity through the IOLAN+

1. On the system management terminal, press ENTER to get the login prompt to the Communication Manager switch. Note: If you get garbled text, check the baud rate setting on the Port Setup Menu. You can adjust it up or down. 2. If no login prompt appears, log back into the IOLAN+ through HyperTerminal. 3. Select Admin mode > stats and press ENTER twice. 4. Select users and press ENTER.
Note:
255
5. Look at the port that the adjunct is connected to and see if there is any traffic. If not, check all your connections and administration fields.
** Administrator ** 1. port1 2. port 2 3. port 3 4. port 4 modem REM <unknown> LOG SERVER STATISTICS Terminal: 2 Talking to host 172.22.22.67.5111<DSR+CTS+DCD >DTR+RTS SERVER STATISTICS <DSR+DCD >DTR+RTS waiting for DSR or DCD >DTR+RTS waiting for DSR or DCD >DTR+RTS logged out logger not enabled
___________________________________________________________________________
Press <RETURN> to see list of options. IOLAN PLUS v4.02.00 a CDi
iolan-st
After you have successfully administered and validated the connection between the adjunct and the S8300 Server through the IOLAN+, you can disconnect the laptop or other PC from the IOLAN+. No further IOLAN+ administration is required.
Potential failure scenarios and repair actions

If a link goes down between the terminal server and the switch, you must reboot the terminal server for the link come back up. If you are performing a software upgrade or if a system reset occurs, you must reboot the terminal server to restore the link. See Rebooting the IOLAN+ on page 252 for instructions.
Administering IP services
For each adjunct that you connect using TCP/IP, you need to administer IP services to establish the IP address/TCP port pairing. The IP address is associated with the node name that you just administered. In this example, we are administering the primary call detail recording (CDR) connection as end-to-end TCP/IP. 1. Type change ip-services and press ENTER to assign the CDR endpoint.
2. In the Service Type field, enter CDR1 for the call accounting link.
change ip-services IP SERVICES Local Remote Port Node 0 callacctg Page 1 of 3
Service Type CDR1
Enabled
Local Node procr
Remote Port 5101
3. In the Local Node field, enter the node name for the switch. In this example, enter procr. 4. The Local Port field defaults to 0 for all client applications. You cannot make an entry in this field. 5. In the Remote Node field, enter the node name for the adjunct, as administered on the Node Names screen. For the call accounting application, type callacctg. 6. In the Remote Port field, enter the TCP listen port assigned to the adjunct. The recommended value for CDR1 is 5101. Note: This number must match the port administered on the end device. If you are using the Downloadable Reliable Session-Layer Protocol tool, this must match the port administered in the Server application. If you are using a terminal server, this number must match the Local Port number on the Port Setup menu. Consult the documentation for your Call Accounting system to determine the appropriate port for the CDR device. 7. Go to Page 3 and type n in the Reliable Protocol field for the CDR Service Type. You do not use RSP with a terminal server.
change ip-services SESSION LAYER TIMERS Packet Resp Session Connect Timer Message Cntr 3 1 Page 3 of 3
Note:
Service Type CDR1
Reliable Protocol n
SPDU Cntr 1
Connectivity Timer 1
8. Press ENTER to save your changes.
257
Call Detail Recording (CDR)

This section provides information on connecting Call Detail Recording (CDR) equipment.
Connecting CDR equipment

The interface between an Avaya server and CDR equipment is a Processor Ethernet Connection. As with C-LAN connections, the CDR adjunct may be a terminal server or a CDR application using RSP. Note: A printer or customer premises equipment (CPE) can also be used as the output receiving device.
Note:
Administering CDR data collection

Note:
Note: To send CDR data using a processor Ethernet interface to a device on the LAN/ WAN, you have the option to enable/disable RSP. 1. Setup the CDR adjunct to be ready to collect CDR data. Record the IP address and the port number of the CDR adjunct, which could be a terminal server or a CDR application that uses RSP. If the CDR adjunct is an application that uses RSP, start the application to listen for a client connection at the port. 2. Access the IP Services screen in Communication Manager (see Administering IP services on page 256), and do the following: a. In the Service Type field, enter CDR1 or CDR2. b. In the Local Node field, enter procr. c. The Local Port field defaults to 0 for all client applications. d. You cannot make an entry in this field. e. In the Remote Node field, enter the node name you assigned to the CDR adjunct in step 2. f. In the Remote Port field, enter the port number used by the CDR adjunct determined in step 1.
Call Detail Recording (CDR)
3. Go to Page 3 and do the following: a. Enter y in the Reliable Protocol field if you have a CDR application using RSP. b. Enter n if the CDR adjunct is connected through a terminal server. c. If RSP is being used, complete the Packet Resp Timer and Connectivity Timer fields with a reasonable value that matches the network condition (recommended values are 30 and 60 seconds, respectively). d. Accept the defaults in the other fields. 4. Administer CDR parameters as described in Administering CDR parameters on page 259.
Administering CDR parameters

You must administer CDR parameters to let the system know that the adjunct is connected through TCP/IP. For details on all fields on the CDR System Parameters screen, see Administrator Guide for Avaya Communication Manager, 03-300509. 1. Type change system-parameters cdr and press ENTER. The CDR System Parameters screen appears.
change system-parameters cdr CDR SYSTEM PARAMETERS Page 1 of 1
Node Number (Local PBX ID): CDR Date Format: month/day Primary Output Format: unformatted Primary Output Endpoint: CDR1 Secondary Output Format: unformatted Secondary Output Endpoint: CDR2 Use ISDN Layouts? n EIA Device Bit Rate: 9600 Use Enhanced Formats? n Condition Code T for Redirected Calls? n Modified Circuit ID Display? n Remove # From Called Number? n Record Outgoing Calls Only? y Intra-switch CDR? n Suppress CDR for Ineffective Call Attempts? y CDR Call Splitting? y Disconnect Information in Place of FRL? n Outg Attd Call Record? y Interworking Feat-flag? n Force Entry of Acct Code for Calls Marked on Toll Analysis Form? n Calls to Hunt Group - Record: member-ext Record Called Vector Directory Number Instead of Group or Member? n Record Called Agent Login ID Instead of Group or Member? n Inc Trk Call Splitting? n Record Non-Call-Assoc TSC? n Call Record Handling Option: warning Record Call-Assoc TSC? n Digits to Record for Outgoing Calls: dialed Privacy - Digits to Hide: 0 CDR Account Code Length: 4
2. In the Primary Output Format field, enter a format specific to the call accounting system, if necessary. In the example, unformatted is used. If you were sending data directly to a printer, you would use printer.
259
3. In the Primary Output Endpoint field, type CDR1. 4. If you use a secondary output device, and that device is also connected through TCP/IP, complete the Secondary Output Format field. Also, type CDR2 in the Secondary Output Endpoint field. 5. Press ENTER to save your changes.
Testing the switch-to-adjunct link

You can use the test, status, busyout and release commands to find and correct problems with CDR links. For more information about these commands, see Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager, Media Gateways and Servers, 03-300431.
status cdr-link CDR LINK STATUS Primary Link State: up Maintenance Busy? no Secondary extension not administered
Work with the vendor to test the link from the call accounting adjunct. If a link does not come up immediately, use the busyout cdr-link and release cdr-link commands to bring up the link. Additional administration procedures for CDR equipment are provided in the Administrator Guide for Avaya Communication Manager, 03-300509.
Reliable Data Transport Tool (RDTT) package
Reliable Data Transport Tool (RDTT) package

Avaya provides this free software application to help vendors and customers develop CDR applications that use the reliable session protocol to collect CDR data from an Avaya Server. The Reliable Data Transport Tool (RDTT) is a testing tool and thus is not supported by Avaya.
What does the RDTT package contain

The RDTT package consists of the following:

Specifications for the Reliable Session Protocol The Client application (Client.exe) This application is designed to help you test the reliable session protocol without use of an Avaya Server.
The Server application (Server.exe) This application is designed to help you understand the reliable session protocol and to start building your products to work with the Avaya Server.
User Guide This document contains information about the client and server applications.
Downloading the RDTT package

The RDTT package is available from the Avaya Support website as a self-extracting executable. 1. Go to the Avaya Support website at http://avaya.com/support. 2. In the Search For text box, type reliable and click Go. 3. Select Reliable Data Transport Client/Server Tool from the list of links that are found. 4. When asked, save the RDTT.exe file to a temporary folder on your computer. It is approximately 1.6 to 2.0 MB in size.
Installing the RDTT package

1. Double-click the RDTT.exe file. The Install Shield Wizard steps you through the installation.
261
2. When prompted to select Client or Server, select both programs. 3. Continue with the installation. Use the default destination folder and program folder.
Administering the RDTT package

See the instructions in the user_guide.doc file to administer the RDTT tool on a PC.
Related topics
See the following topics related to CDR:
Chapter 16, Collecting Billing Information, in Administrator Guide for Avaya Communication Manager, 03-300509. Call Detail Recording in Chapter 21, Features and Technical Reference in Administrator Guide for Avaya Communication Manager, 03-300509.
Printers
For connecting a printer to a G450 Media Gateway, see Terminal server installation on page 245 for more information.
DS1/T1 CPE loopback jack

This section provides information on how to install and use a DS1 loopback jack to test the DS1 span between the Avaya Server or Gateway and the network interface point. The loopback jack is required when DC power is at the interface to the MM710 media module. Note: Do not remove the loopback jack after installation. It should always be available for remote tests of the DS1 span. Note: For G450 Media Gateway systems, the channel service unit (CSU) is integrated within the MM710 Media Module. This means that there is no need for a separate external device. The loopback jack isolates the MM710 internal CSU from the DC power and properly loops the DC span power.
Note:
Note:
This section covers:

Installing a loopback jack on page 263 Administering a loopback jack on page 264 Testing a loopback jack with a smart jack on page 265 Testing a loopback jack without a smart jack on page 274 Configurations using fiber multiplexers on page 276
Installing a loopback jack

You can use one of two installation options:

Installing a loopback jack with a smart jack on page 264 Installing a loopback jack without a smart jack on page 264
Selecting the loopback jack installation method

Select the installation method as follows:
Install the loopback jack at the interface to the smart jack, if possible. This position provides maximum coverage of CPE wiring when remote loopback tests are run.
If the smart jack is not accessible, install the loopback jack at the extended demarcation point.
263
If there is no extended demarcation point, install the loopback jack directly at the network interface point as shown in Figure 148. If there is an extended demarcation point and the smart jack is not accessible, install the loopback jack as shown in Figure 149. If there is an extended demarcation point, but the smart jack is accessible, install the loopback jack as shown in Figure 150.
Installing a loopback jack with a smart jack

1. Disconnect the RJ-48 (8-wide) connector at the appropriate interface point, and connect the loopback jack in series with the DS1 span. See Figure 148 through Figure 150. 2. Plug the H600-383 cable from the MM710 into the female connector on the loopback jack. 3. Plug the male connector on the loopback jack cable into the network interface point. Note: Do not remove the loopback jack after installation. This is not a test tool and should always be available to remotely test a DS1 span.
Note:
Installing a loopback jack without a smart jack

Install the loopback jack at the point where the cabling from the MM710 plugs into the dumb block. However, if there is more than one dumb block, choose the one that is closest to the Interface Termination feed or the fiber MUX, to provide maximum coverage for loopback jack tests. Refer to Figure 151 and Figure 152. 1. Disconnect the RJ-48 (8-wide) connector at the appropriate interface point, and connect the loopback jack in series with the DS1 span. See Figure 151 through Figure 152. 2. Plug the H600-383 cable from the MM710 into the female connector on the loopback jack. 3. Plug the male connector on the loopback jack cable into the network interface point. Note: Do not remove the loopback jack after installation. This is not a test tool and should always be available to remotely test a DS1 span.
Note:
Administering a loopback jack

1. At the management terminal, type change ds1 location where location is the DS1 interface circuit pack corresponding to the loopback jack.
2. Verify that the near-end CSU type is set to integrated. 3. On page 2 of the form, change the supply CPE loopback jack power field to y. Setting this field to y informs the technician that a loopback jack is present on the facility and allows the technician to determine that the facility is available for remote testing. 4. Enter save translation to save the new information.
Testing a loopback jack with a smart jack

The loopback jack and smart jack isolate faults by dividing the DS1 span into three sections (see Figure 148 through Figure 150). These three sections are:

From the MM710 to the loopback jack From the loopback jack to the smart jack (network interface point) From the smart jack to the CO
The first two sections are your responsibility. The last is the responsibility of the DS1 service provider.
Testing the DS1 span from the MM710 to the loopback jack
The DS1 span test has 2 parts:
Checking for circuit connectivity between the DS1 circuit pack and the loopback jack. The first part of the test powers-up the loopback jack and sends a signal from the DS1 circuit pack, through the wiring, to the loopback jack. The test allows about 10 seconds for the signal to loop around the loopback jack and return to the DS1 circuit pack. Then it sends the results to the management terminal and proceeds to the second part of the test.
The second part of the test sends the standard, 3-in-24 DS1 stress-testing pattern from the DS1 board, through the loopback jack, and back to a bit error detector and counter on the DS1 board. A bit-error rate counter displays the results on the management terminal until you terminate the test.
Always perform both parts of the test. Proceed as follows.
Checking the integrity of local equipment

Before you go any further, make sure that the problem is actually on the DS1 span by testing the equipment that connects to the span at the near end. Test the DS1 circuit pack, and perform any needed maintenance or repairs.
265
1. On the SAT, type busyout board XXXVS where XXX is the administered number of the G450 (for example, 002), and VS is the slot number on the G450 of the Media Module (for example, V3). 2. Type change ds1 XXXVS to open the DS1 administration form. 3. Make sure that the near-end csu type field is set to integrated. 4. Go to page 2 of the DS1 administration form, and verify that the value of the TX LBO field is 0dB. 5. If the value of the TX LBO field is not 0dB, record the current value. Then set the TX LBO field to 0dB for testing. 6. Press ENTER to make the changes. 7. Type test ds1-loop XXXVS cpe-loopback-jack. where XXX is the administered number of the G450 (for example, 002), and VS is the slot number on the G450 of the Media Module (for example, V3). The loopback jack powers up. Active, DS1 facility alarms (if any) clear. After about 20 seconds, the first set of results appears on the terminal. 8. If FAIL appears on the terminal display, there may be a fault in the wiring between the MM710 and the loopback jack or the loopback jack may itself be faulty. Isolate the problem by replacing the loopback jack and repeating step 8. 9. If FAIL still appears after the loopback jack has been replaced, suspect a wiring problem. Replace the cable between the MM710 and the loopback jack. Then repeat step 8. 10. When PASS appears on the terminal, proceed with the second part of the test, checking the integrity of transmitted data.
Testing the integrity of data sent over the loop

Now perform the second part of the test, checking for data errors. Note: The loss of signal (LOS) alarm (demand test #138) is not processed during this test while the 3-in-24 pattern is active. 1. At the SAT, type clear meas ds1 loop XXXVS to zero out the bit-error counter where XXX is the administered number of the G450 (for example, 002), and VS is the slot number on the G450 of the Media Module (for example, V3). 2. Type clear meas ds1 log XXXVS to zero out the performance measurement counter. 3. Type clear meas ds1 esf XXXVS to zero out the ESF error count. 4. Type list meas ds1 sum XXXVS to display the bit error count.
Note:
267
5. Step through Table 28 to troubleshoot. Table 28: DS1 Troubleshooting Condition The value of the Test: cpe-loopback-jack field is Pattern 3-in-24 The value of the Synchronized field is N The value of the Synchronized field remains N after 5 tries Solution The loopback jack test is active.
Retry the test 5 times. Excessive bit errors are likely. Check for intermittent connections or broken wires in an SPE receive or transmit pair, and repair as necessary. Then repeat step 1. Repeat step 1 several times. The DS1 circuit pack has synchronized to the looped 3-in-24 pattern and is counting bit errors in the pattern. Suspect loose or corroded connections, severe crosstalk, or impedance imbalances between the two conductors of the receive or transmit pair. Wiring may need replacement. There are no obvious wiring problems. Verify this by repeating step 1 at 1-minute to 10-minute intervals until you are certain. If the test reports no errors for 1 minute, the error rate is less than 1 in 108. If the test reports no errors for 10 minutes, the error rate is less than 1 in 109.
The value of the Bit-error count field is non-zero The value of the Synchronized field is Y
The value of the Bit-error count field pegs at 65535 or increments by 100s or 1000s each time you repeat step 1
The value of the Bit-error count field is 0
Once you are fairly certain that the test is reporting no errors (after at least 1 error-free minute), confirm that the 3-in-24 pattern error detector is operating. 6. Type test ds1-loop XXXVS inject-single-bit-error. where XXX is the administered number of the G450 (for example, 002), and VS is the slot number on the G450 of the Media Module (for example, V3). 7. Type list meas ds1 sum XXXVS to display the bit error count again.
8. Step through Table 29 to troubleshoot. Table 29: DS1 Bit-error count troubleshooting Condition The value of the Bit-error count field is greater than 1 The value of the Bit-error count field is 1 Solution Replace the DS1 circuit pack, and retest. The test passed.
9. Type test ds1-loop location end-loopback/span-test to end the test. Wait about 30 seconds for the DS1 to reframe on the incoming signal and clear DS1 facility alarms. Use Table 30 to evaluate the test results and to determine the solution. Table 30: Evaluation of DS1 CPE loopback and service provider test results Condition Loopback termination fails with an error code of 1313 Loopback termination still fails The DS1 cannot frame on the incoming spans signal after the loopback jack power down Solution The span is still looped somewhere, possibly at the loopback jack, at the MM710, or somewhere in the network. Replace the DS1 circuit pack, and repeat the test. Either there is something wrong with the receive signal into the loopback jack from the dumb block or the smart jack, or there is something wrong with the MM710 media module itself. To rule out the MM710 media module, insert a transmit to receive loop around and verify that the MM710 can frame to its own signal. The problem is in the service providers network. If the MM710 media module successfully passes the CPE Loopback Jack test, then the wiring between the loopback jack and the smart jack is suspect. Test and make repairs as needed. The test will not terminate normally in the absence of a good framing signal. You have to reset the circuit pack. Enter reset board XXXVS. Proceed with step 10.
The span failed the service providers loopback test The service provider successfully loop tested the span, up to the smart jack You cannot locate and repair the problem in the time available and must terminate the test The test terminated normally
269
10. To restore DS1 administration: a. At the SAT, type change ds1 XXXVS to open the DS1 administration form. b. Go to page 2 of the DS1 administration form. c. Change the value of the TX LBO field to the original value that you wrote down when you were administering the DS1 for the test. d. Press ENTER to save the changes. 11. To release the DS1 circuit pack: a. At the SAT, type release board XXXVS. b. Leave the loopback jack in place.
Testing the DS1 span from the smart jack to the network interface termination or fiber multiplexer (MUX)
1. Have the service provider run a smart-jack loopback test against the network interface wiring that links the smart jack to the CO (section 3 in Figure 148 through Figure 150). 2. If the tests fails, there is a problem on the network side. Have the service provider correct it.
Testing the DS1 span from the loopback jack to the smart jack
Note: This test cannot isolate the problem if there are problems in the wiring between the far-end CO and the far-end MM710. You must coordinate this test with the DS1 service provider.
Note:
Test the short length of customer premises wiring between the loopback jack and the smart jack (Section 2 in the following 3 figures) using a loopback that overlaps this section of the span. 1. Have the DS1 service provider at the CO end run a local MM710 line loopback test. 2. Have the DS1 service provider at the CO end run a local DS1 payload loopback test. 3. Run a far-end MM710 line loopback, using the following procedure: a. From the SAT, type test ds1-loop XXXVS far-csu-loopback-test-begin where XXX is the administered number of the G450 (for example, 002), and VS is the slot number on the G450 of the Media Module (for example, V3). b. Examine the bit-error counts, as in Testing the integrity of data sent over the loop on page 267. c. Type test ds1-loop location end-loopback/span-test to terminate the test.
If the tests fails and there were no problems Testing the DS1 span from the MM710 to the loopback jack or Testing the DS1 span from the smart jack to the network interface termination or fiber multiplexer (MUX), there is a problem between the loopback jack to the smart jack. Work with the service provider to isolate the fault. Figure 148: Network interface at smart jack for an MM710 multi-media module
SYSTEM
MDM
ALM CPU PWR
1
USB
CONSOLE
SERVICES COMPACT FLASH
ETR
CCA
ETH WAN
ETH LAN
G450
RST ASB 6
CARD IN USE
V10 V1 V5
V2
V6
V3
V7
V4
V8
Figure notes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Span section 1 Span section 2 Span section 3 G450 Media Gateway E1/T1 port on an MM710 multi-media module 6. RJ-48 to network interface (up to 1000 ft [305 m]) 7. Loopback jack 8. Network interface smart jack 9. Interface termination or fiber multiplexer (MUX) 10. Central office
271
Figure 149: Network interface at extended demarcation point (smart jack inaccessible) for an MM710 multi-media module
SYSTEM
MDM
ALM CPU PWR
1
USB
CONSOLE
ETR
CCA
ETH WAN
ETH LAN
G450
RST ASB 6
CARD IN USE
V10 V1 V5
V2
V6
V3
V7
V4
V8
Figure notes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Span section 1 Span section 2 Span section 3 G450 Media Gateway E1/T1 port on an MM710 multi-media module 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. RJ-48 to network interface (up to 1000 ft [305 m]) Loopback jack Dumb block (extended demarcation) Network interface smart jack Interface termination or fiber multiplexer (MUX) Central office
Figure 150: Network interface at extended demarcation point (smart jack accessible) for an MM710 multi-media module
SYSTEM
MDM
ALM CPU PWR
1
USB
CONSOLE
ETR
CCA
ETH WAN
ETH LAN
G450
RST ASB 6
CARD IN USE
V10 V1 V5
V2
V6
V3
V7
V4
V8
Figure notes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Span section 1 Span section 2 Span section 3 G450 Media Gateway E1/T1 port on an MM710 multi-media module 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. RJ-48 to network interface (up to 1000 ft [305 m]) Dumb block (extended demarcation) Loopback jack Network interface smart jack Interface termination or fiber multiplexer (MUX) Central office Dumb block to smart jack RJ-48
273
Testing a loopback jack without a smart jack

When the loopback jack is added to a span that does not contain a smart jack, the span is divided into two sections: from the MM710 to the loopback jack and from the loopback jack to the central office (CO). Section 2 includes the short cable from the loopback jack to the dumb block demarcation point (part of the loopback jack). This cable is the only part of Section 2 that is part of customer premises wiring. It is not covered in the loopback jacks loopback path. See Figure 151 and Figure 152. Figure 151: Network interface at dumb block for an MM710 multi-media module
SYSTEM
MDM
ALM CPU PWR
1
USB
CONSOLE
ETR
CCA
ETH WAN
ETH LAN
G450
RST ASB 6
CARD IN USE
V10 V1 V5
V2
V6
V3
V7
V4
V8
Figure notes: 1. 2. 3. 4. Span section 1 Span section 2 G450 Media Gateway E1/T1 port on an MM710 multi-media module 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. RJ-48 to network interface (up to 1000 ft [305 m]) Loopback jack Dumb block (demarcation point) Interface termination or fiber multiplexer (MUX) Central office
Figure 152: Network interface at dumb block with repeater line to fiber MUX for an MM710 multi-media module
SYSTEM
MDM
ALM CPU PWR
1
USB
CONSOLE
ETR
CCA
ETH WAN
ETH LAN
G450
RST ASB 6
CARD IN USE
V10 V1 V5
V2
V6
V3
V7
V4
V8
Figure notes: 1. 2. 3. 4. Span section 1 Span section 2 G450 Media Gateway E1/T1 port on an MM710 multi-media module 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. RJ-48 to network interface (up to 1000 ft [305 m]) Loopback jack Dumb block (demarcation point) Repeater Fiber multiplexer (MUX) Central office
You are responsible for finding and correcting problems in the customer wiring (section 1 and the loopback cable portion of section 2). The DS1 service provider is responsible for finding and correcting problems in the majority of section 2. 1. Test customer premises wiring from the MM710 to the loopback jack, as described in Testing the DS1 span from the loopback jack to the smart jack on page 270. 2. Test the loopback jack-to-dumb block and dumb block-to-CO wiring (section 2 in Figure 151 and Figure 152). This can be done using a loopback that overlaps the section of the span. Any of the following loopbacks can do this:
The local MM710s line loopback, which the DS1 service provider at the CO end typically activates, tests, and then deactivates.
275
The local DS1 interfaces payload loopback, which the DS1 service provider at the CO end activates and tests. The far-end MM710s line loopback: a. At the SAT type test ds1-loop location far-csu-loopback-test-begin to activate this test, where location is the DS1 interface circuit pack corresponding to the loopback jack. b. Type test ds1-loop location end-loopback/span-test to terminate this test, where location is the DS1 interface circuit pack corresponding to the loopback jack.
Bit error counts are examined as described in Testing the DS1 span from the MM710 to the loopback jack on page 265. This test only isolates problems to Section 2 wiring if there are no problems in the wiring between the far-end CO and the far-end MM710. Coordinate this test with the DS1 service provider. Failure of any of these tests indicate a problem in Section 2. This could mean bad loopback jack -to-dumb block cabling, but is more likely to indicate a problem somewhere between the dumb block and the CO. This is the responsibility of the DS1 service provider. If the DS1 Span Test confirms that there are no problems in Section 1, the technician should proceed as follows to avoid unnecessary dispatch: a. Identify and contact the DS1 service provider. b. Inform the DS1 provider that loopback tests of the CPE wiring to the dumb block (section 1) showed no problems. c. If the far-end MM710 line loopback test failed, inform the DS1 provider. d. Request that the DS1 provider perform a loopback test of their portion of the Section 2 wiring by sending someone out to loop Section 2 back to the CO at the dumb block. If this test fails, the problem is in the service providers wiring. If the test passes, the problem is in the cable between the loopback jack and the dumb block. Replace the loopback jack.
Configurations using fiber multiplexers

Use the loopback jack when customer premises DS1 wiring connects to an on-site fiber multiplexer (MUX) and allows wiring to the network interface point on the MUX to be remotely tested. This requires that the MM710 CSU be set so it can be used on DS1 wiring to the MUX. Fiber MUXs can take the place of Interface termination feeds as shown in Figure 148 through Figure 151. Test these spans using the same procedures as metallic spans.
Note:
Note: Fiber MUXs may have loopback capabilities that the service provider can activate from the CO end. These may loop the signal back to the CO or back to the DS1 MM710. If the MUX provides the equivalent of a line loopback on the problem DS1 facility, activate it after a successful loopback jack test, and use it to isolate problems to the wiring between the loopback jack and the MUX.
!
Important:
Important: Be aware that there are installations that use repeater-augmented metallic lines between the MUX and the dumb block. These lines require DC power for the repeaters and this DC power is present at the dumb block interface to the CPE equipment. A loopback jack is required in this configuration to properly isolate and terminate the DC power.
Checking for the presence of DC

1. Make the following four measurements at the network interface jack:

From transmit tip (T, Pin 5) to receive tip (T1, Pin 2) From transmit ring (R, Pin 4) to receive ring (R1, Pin 1) From transmit tip (T, Pin 5) to transmit ring (R, Pin 4) From receive tip (T1, Pin 2) to receive ring (R1, Pin 1)
All measurements should read 0 (zero) volts DC.
277
External modems
The following section assumes that you are using one of the recommended external modems. However, any locally obtained, type-approved external modem should work. Contact your Avaya representative for more information. Recommended modems include:
Multi-Tech MT5634ZBA-USB-V92
This section covers:

Hardware required when configuring modems on page 278 Multi-Tech MT5634ZBA-USB-V92 on page 278 Multi-Tech MT5634ZBA-V92-GLOBAL on page 279 Administering Multi-Tech modems on page 279
Hardware required when configuring modems

To configure many modems, you use the Hayes-compatible AT command set. Note: If your modem uses a USB connection, use the USB ports instead of the serial port. Also, AT commands are not required, so you can skip this section. Use the factory defaults.
Note:
Before you can enter AT configuration commands, you must first connect a terminal or a PC with a keyboard, monitor, and terminal-emulation software to the modem, as follows: 1. Connect one end of an RS-232 cable to an RS-232, serial-communications port (often called a COM port) on the terminal or PC. 2. Connect the other end of the RS-232 cable to the modem. 3. If you are using a PC, start your terminal emulation software.
Multi-Tech MT5634ZBA-USB-V92
Avaya recommends using a Multi-Tech USB modem, model MT5634ZBA-USB-V92, with an S8300/700, S8500, or S8700-series configuration. This modem is used for sending alarms, as well as for remote dial up to the server for maintenance and administration.
External modems
Configuring the MT5634ZBA-USB-V92 modem

In the United States, the Multi-Tech MT5634ZBA-US-V92 modem gets configured automatically through the USB port with the factory defaults. No special configuration is necessary. In a non-US country, the modem may require settings specific to the country in which the modem will be used.
Multi-Tech MT5634ZBA-V92-GLOBAL
Avaya recommends using a Multi-Tech serial modem, model MT5634ZBA-V92-GLOBAL, with a G450 media gateway. The Multi-Tech serial modem connects the G450 media gateway to an external trunk. This connection enables remote dial in capability for administration and troubleshooting.
Administering Multi-Tech modems

The Multi-Tech modems do not require administration if used in the United States. In non-US countries, these modems may require administration. For the full range of modem options, see the Administrator Guide for Avaya Communication Manager, 03-300509.
279
Busy tone disconnect equipment for non-U.S. installations

The customer-provided busy tone disconnect adjunct detects busy tone disconnects of incoming calls on loop-start, 2-wire, analog trunks. In some non-U.S. countries where a G450 Media Gateway is used, the PSTN sends busy tone as the disconnect signal. Therefore, the S8300 Server, G450 Media Gateway requires a busy tone disconnect adjunct. Figure 153 shows typical connections. Figure 153: Typical cabling for busy tone disconnect
1 2 3 4 4 2 4 5
cydf057 RPY 123097
Figure notes: 1. Public switched telephone network 2. Main distribution frame 3. Busy tone disconnect device 4. Tip and ring wires 5. To loop-start, central-office, trunk MM711 analog media module
Music-on-hold
Music-on-hold
The music-on-hold (MOH) feature allows a caller to hear music when that caller is placed on hold. This section covers:

Installing a non-FCC-registered music source on a G450 Media Gateway on page 281 Installing an FCC-registered music source on a G450 Media Gateway on page 284
Music-on-hold can be provided:
Through a port on an MM711 Analog Media Module to a customer-supplied music source on a G450 Media Gateway Through a port on an MM711 Analog Media Module or MM714 Analog Media Module to a customer-supplied music source on a G450 Media Gateway
On a G450 Media Gateway, the music-on-hold feature is connected through a port on an MM711 Analog Media Module or an MM714 Analog Media Module. The G450 Media Gateway does not support an auxiliary trunk circuit pack. Therefore, for S8300 Server users, the music-on-hold feature through an auxiliary trunk is not supported. However, G450 Media Gateway users with an S8500 or S8700-series Server as primary controller can access the music-on-hold feature, if their equipment is physically connected to a TN763 auxiliary trunk circuit pack in an EPN carrier of an S8500 or S8700-series system.
Installing a non-FCC-registered music source on a G450 Media Gateway

Figure 154 and Figure 155 show the connections for the music-on-hold feature on a G450 Media Gateway for a non-FCC-registered source. Note: The G350 Media Gateways physical connection with the MM711 Analog Media Module or MM714 Analog Media Module is the same as the G450 Media Gateways connection with the MM711 Analog Media Module. Note: If you want multiple music sources, you must use multiple ports on the MM711 Analog Media Module.
Note:
Note:
281
Connecting a non-FCC-registered music-on-hold source to a G450 using a KS-23395-L3 coupler

Figure 154: Non-FCC-registered music-on-hold equipment connecting to KS-23395-L3 for a G450 Media Gateway
SYSTEM
MDM
ALM CPU PWR
1
USB
CONSOLE
ETR
CCA
ETH WAN
ETH LAN
G450
RST ASB 6
CARD IN USE
V10 V1 V5
V2
V6
V3
V7
V4
V8
Figure notes: 1. G450 Media Gateway 2. MM711 Analog Media Module 3. RJ-45 connection 4. KS-23395-L3 coupler 5. RCA cord 6. Music source
1. Connect one end of an RJ-45 cable to a port in the MM711 Media Module, or to a port or trunk port in the MM714 Media Module. 2. Connect the other end of the RJ-45 cable to a KS-23395-L3 coupler. 3. Connect the KS-23395-L3 coupler to the customer-supplied music source. Follow the manufacturers instructions to properly connect the music source to the KS-23395-L3 coupler. Normally, you simply use an RCA cord. 4. Administer the switch for the new equipment.
Music-on-hold
Connecting a non-FCC-registered music-on-hold source to a G450 using a KS-23395-L4 coupler

Figure 155: Non-FCC-registered music-on-hold equipment connecting to KS-23395-L4 for a G450 Media Gateway
SYSTEM
MDM
ALM CPU PWR
1
USB
CONSOLE
ETR
CCA
ETH WAN
ETH LAN
G450
RST ASB 6
CARD IN USE
V10 V1 V5
V2
V6
V3
V7
V4
V8
Figure notes: 1. 2. 3. 4. G450 Media Gateway MM711 Analog Media Module RJ-45 connection KS-23395-L4 coupler 5. 6. 7. 8. 8-pair modular cord 909A/B universal coupler 8-pair modular cord Music source
1. Connect one end of an RJ-45 cable to a port in the MM711 Analog Media Module. 2. Connect the other end of the RJ-45 cable to a KS-23395-L4 coupler. 3. Connect the KS-23395-L4 coupler to the 909A/B universal coupler using a 8-pair modular cord. 4. Connect the 909A/B universal coupler to the music source using a 8-pair modular cord. 5. Administer the switch for the new equipment. Note: For additional installation information, refer to 909A/909B Universal Coupler Installation Instructions, which is normally shipped with the 909A/909B Universal Coupler.
Note:
283
Installing an FCC-registered music source on a G450 Media Gateway

Figure 156 show the connections for the music-on-hold feature on a G450 Media Gateway for an FCC-registered source. Note: If you want multiple music sources, you must use multiple ports on the MM711 Analog Media Module.
Note:
Connecting an FCC-registered music-on-hold source to a G450 using a KS-23395-L4 coupler

Figure 156: FCC-registered music-on-hold equipment connecting to KS-23395-L4 for a G450 Media Gateway
SYSTEM
MDM
ALM CPU PWR
1
USB
CONSOLE
ETR
CCA
ETH WAN
ETH LAN
G450
RST ASB 6
CARD IN USE
V10 V1 V5
V2
V6
V3
V7
V4
V8
Figure notes: 1. G450 Media Gateway 2. MM711 Analog Media Module 3. RJ-45 connection 4. KS-23395-L4 coupler 5. 8-pair modular cord 6. Music source
1. Connect one end of an RJ-45 cable to a port in the MM711 Analog Media Module. 2. Connect the KS-23395-L4 coupler to the customer-supplied music source. Normally, you simply use a 8-pair modular cord. 3. Administer the switch for the new equipment.
Paging and announcement equipment
Paging and announcement equipment

This section provides information on loudspeaker paging. On a G450 Media Gateway, the loudspeaker paging feature is connected through a port on an MM711 Analog Media Module. The port is administered on the SAT Station screen, not the Loudspeaker Paging screen. The G450 Media Gateway does not support an auxiliary trunk circuit pack. Therefore, the loudspeaker feature through an auxiliary trunk is not supported on a G450 Media Gateway. Users on a G450 Media Gateway controlled by an S8700-series or S8500 can also access the loudspeaker paging feature if equipment is physically connected to a TN763 auxiliary trunk circuit pack in an PN carrier of an the S8700-series or S8500 system. Figure 157 shows the connections for loudspeaker paging, dial dictation, or recorded announcement features on a G450 Media Gateway.
Hooking up loudspeaker paging from a G450 Media Gateway

Figure 157: Typical loudspeaker equipment connections for a G450 Media Gateway
SYSTEM
MDM
ALM CPU PWR
1
USB
CONSOLE
ETR
CCA
ETH WAN
ETH LAN
G450
RST ASB 6
CARD IN USE
V10 V1 V5
V2
V6
V3
V7
V4
V8
Figure notes: 1. G450 Media Gateway 2. Universal Paging access module 3. RJ-45 connection 4. Telephone hybrid (third party) device 5. Loudspeaker paging system
1. Connect one end of an RJ-45 cable to a port in the MM711 Analog Media Module. 2. Connect the other end of the RJ-45 cable to a customer-supplied telephone hybrid device. 3. Follow the manufacturers instructions to properly connect the telephone hybrid device to your loudspeaker paging system. 4. Administer the M711 port on the SAT Station screen as an analog station.
285
Note:
Note: Do not administer the MM711 port on the SAT Loudspeaker Paging screen.
Adjunct Information Sources

This section lists documents you can use for installation of some of the key adjunct systems that you can connect. This section covers:

Call Management System INTUITY AUDIX Messaging Systems Avaya Modular Messaging System Avaya Interactive Response Avaya EC500 Extension to Cellular and Off-PBX Stations Avaya SIP Enablement Services Call Accounting Systems
Call Management System

For information on installing Call Management System R3V12, see the following:
Avaya Call Management System (CMS) R12 Software Installation, Maintenance, and Troubleshooting Guide (585-215-117) Avaya Call Management System (CMS) Sun Enterprise 3500 Computer Hardware Installation, Maintenance, and Troubleshooting (585-215-873) Avaya CMS R12 Sun Blade 100/150 Workstation Hardware Installation, Maintenance, and Troubleshooting (585-215-783) Avaya CMS Sun Fire V880 Computer Hardware Installation, Maintenance, and Troubleshooting (585-215-116)
Adjunct Information Sources
INTUITY AUDIX Messaging Systems

For information on installing INTUITY AUDIX Messaging systems, see one of the following:
For INTUITY AUDIX Release 5.1 Messaging, see INTUITY Messaging Solutions Release 5 Installation for New Systems on the INTUITY Messaging Solutions Release 5 Documentation CD-ROM, 585-313-803. For INTUITY AUDIX LX Messaging, see INTUITY AUDIX LX Installation Checklist on the INTUITY AUDIX LX Release 1 Documentation CD-ROM, 585-313-818. Avaya IA770 INTUITY AUDIX Messaging, Release 3.0, Installation, Upgrades, and Troubleshooting, 11-300532. For IA770 INTUITY AUDIX Messaging R1.3 (when available), go to http://support.avaya.com.
Avaya Modular Messaging System

For information on installing Avaya Modular Messaging systems, see Modular Messaging Release 2.0 Documentation CD-ROM, 11-300121.
Avaya Interactive Response

For information on installing Avaya Interactive Response systems, see Avaya Interactive Response R1.3 Installation, Migration, and Troubleshooting Guide (07-300180) on the Avaya Interactive Response R1.3 Documentation CD (07-300181).
Avaya EC500 Extension to Cellular and Off-PBX Stations

For information on installing Avaya EC500 Extension to Cellular and Off-PBX Station systems, see the Avaya EC500 Extension to Cellular and Off-PBX Station (OPS) Installation and Administration Guide, 210-100-500.
Avaya SIP Enablement Services

For information on installing Avaya SIP Enablement Services (SES), see the SIP Enablement Services Implementation Guide, 16-300140, and SIP Support in Avaya Communication Manager 4.0, 555-245-206.
287
Call Accounting Systems

For information on installing Call Accounting Systems, see the online help or documentation included with the eCAS software CD-ROM.
Appendix F: Information Checklists

This appendix can be used as an aid for collecting necessary information for the installation of an Avaya G450 Media Gateway Media Gateway. The following lists are provided:

Installer's Checklist: Tools, software, laptop settings, customer network information Serial Number and Login Information: Serial number of the G450 and login/passwords for various access methods Quick Setup for G450 Media Gateway Processor (MGP): IP addresses and setup commands for the MGP Installation Site Information: Customer and site contact information
289
Information Checklists
Installer's Checklist
Tools laptop with 32 MB RAM 40 MB available disk space RS-232 port connector or Ethernet interface cross-over Ethernet cables direct Ethernet cable serial cable and adapter USB flash drive (optional) screwdriver Software Windows 95/98/ME/XP/NT/2000/Vista operating system FTP server program. TFTP server program and SCP server program are recommended Telnet program terminal emulation program: HyperTerminal or other TCP/IP networking software: bundled with Windows OS web browser: Netscape 4.7x or Internet Explorer 5.0 Ethernet connections laptop default address and mask: 192.11.13.5, 255.255.255.252 browser: no proxies communications properties: 9600 baud rate; no parity; 8 data bits, 1 stop bit; no flow SSO login Obtaining this login will require that you complete the authentication process. You will not be able to obtain the license file or to perform remote feature activation without the SSO login authentication process. You will not be able to obtain the license file or to perform remote feature activation without the SSO login. Dial plan IP addressing plan List of customer-provided IP services
Serial Number and Login Information
Serial Number and Login Information

G450 Serial Number
Logins
Name & Password S8300 Server G450 Media Gateway SSO Authentication Login ftp Communication Manager anonymous email address
291
Quick Setup for G450 Media Gateway Processor (MGP)

Task
Define a Primary Management Interface (PMI)
CLI Command
Enter the context of the interface which you want to set as the Primary Management Interface (PMI). For example:
Requested Fields vlan id
Information to enter
interface vlan
In the context of the interface, assign an IP address and subnet mask to the interface:
IP address netmask
ip address
In the context of the interface, define this interface as the PMI
pmi
Configure the ICC-VLAN Note: By default, the ICC-VLAN is 1. Therefore configure the ICC-VLAN only if you wish to configure it for a VLAN other than 1. Create a vlan and enter its configuration context:
vlan id
interface vlan
In the context of the vlan interface, set the current vlan as the icc-vlan:
icc-vlan
Set the VLAN ID of a LAN port (10/5 or 10/6) to the VLAN number of the ICC-VLAN:
vlan id module number port number hostname gateway IP address IP address1 IP address2 IP address3 IP address4
set port vlan

Define the CLI prompt Define a default gateway Create a list of valid Media Gateway Controller(s)
hostname ip default-gateway set mgc list
Display device information
show system
Installation Site Information
Installation Site Information

Site Name Installation Address Main Phone
Shipping Address
Customer Contact
Name Title Phone: FAX: Mobile: Pager: email: Off-hours contact: Sales/AE phone: Other Contact Info:
Salesperson/ Account Exec
Notes to installer: access procedures, safety/security procedures
Access Contact
Name Title Phone: FAX: Mobile: Pager: email: Off-hours contact:
Installer Name Date of Installation
293
Appendix G: Equipment List

The following lists contain information necessary for ordering Avaya G450 Media Gateway and Avaya S8300 Server equipment. Note: If ordering parts, use the 9-digit "Comcode" numbers, not the 6-digit numbers. Table 31: Equipment List: Avaya G450 Media Gateway Avaya G450 Media Gateway The Avaya G450 Media Gateway is a 19-inch 3u rack-mountable device. The G450 Media Gateway contains VoIP resources, a layer 2 switch, modular interface connectivity for traditional trunk and station access, and performs the function of a gateway/gatekeeper. It also houses eight Media Module Bays. The Avaya G450 Media Gateway is designed to offer options and scalability. You can mix and match Media Modules, as well as add additional Avaya G450 Media Gateways as they grow in size. Avaya G450 Media Gateway Comcodes (for Services Ordering Only) Comcode 700407802 Number of Items 1 Description G450 chassis/Main board/ 80 channel DSP daughterboard/ 1 PSU G450 chassis/Main board/ 20 channel DSP daughterboard/ 1 PSU Rack Mount screw set for attaching the ears to the rack Rack Mount Ears Cable Management Ear Rack Mount screw set for attaching the ears to the chassis Feet Tech Laptop Cable Media Module Blanks 1 of 2
Note:
700432487
700017932 700438997 700439003 700305535 700318421 700318397 700336597
1 2 1 15 4 1 8
295
Equipment List
Table 31: Equipment List: Avaya G450 Media Gateway (continued) Avaya G450 Media Gateway 700336621 700439011 700236680 700439029 2 1 1 1 Low-Profile blanks (S8300) G450 PSU Blank Panel Grounding Kit for multiple G450s in a 19 inch rack Cable grounding terminal-ring to open end 10AWG, 8M
Avaya G450 Media Gateway Comcodes for Customer and Services ordering Comcode 700407802 Description G450 chassis/Main board/ 80 channel DSP daughterboard/ 1 PSU G450 chassis/Main board/ 20 channel DSP daughterboard/ 1 PSU G450 main board 80 channels DSP daughterboard 20 channels DSP daughterboard G450 Power Supply Unit 400W AC G450 Chassis G450 Fan tray 808A Emergency Transfer Panel 2 of 2
700432487
700432495 700432503 700432511 700432529 700432537 700438278 700394992
Table 32: Equipment List: G450 Media Gateway Power Cords G450 Media Gateway Power Cords Supplies Power to the G450 Media Gateway. One cord per gateway is required, and there are various cords depending on the power required for the country in which the unit will be installed. When you order this material code, a descriptive attribute will be required; the attributes are: Attribute CRD CRD CRD CRD CRD CRD Option 30 31 32 33 34 42 Comcode: Description 405362641: PWR CORD 9X10IN USA 17505 407786623: PWR CORD 98IN EUROPE 12013S 407786599: PWR CORD 98IN UNITED KINGDOM 14012 407786631: PWR CORD 98IN AUSTRALIA 15012 407790591: PWR CORD INDIA P250CIM 408161453: PWR CORD 96IN ARGENTINA
297
Equipment List
Table 33: Equipment List: Avaya S8300B Server Server S8300B Server The Avaya S8300B Server is an Intel-based server complex that carries:

administration and maintenance provisioning software Hard drive (Field-replaceable. Comcode: 700307028) 512 MB RAM Web serve Linux OS H.248 Media Gateway Signaling Protocol CCMS messages tunneled over H.248 Signaling Protocol TFTP server
The S8300B Server can act as the primary server of the G450 Media Gateway, or it can serve as a local survivable processor for remote/branch customer locations. Comcode (for Services Ordering Only): 700335144
Table 34: Equipment List: Avaya S8300C Server Server S8300C Server The Avaya S8300C Server is an Intel-based server complex that carries:

administration and maintenance provisioning software Hard drive (Field-replaceable. Comcode: 700307028) One GB RAM Web serve Linux OS H.248 Media Gateway Signaling Protocol CCMS messages tunneled over H.248 Signaling Protocol TFTP server
The S8300C Server can act as the primary server of the G450 Media Gateway, or it can serve as a local survivable processor for remote/branch customer locations. Comcode (for Services Ordering Only): 700407810
299
Equipment List
Table 35: Equipment List: Media Modules Media Modules MM710 T1/E1 Media Module Comcode (for Services Ordering Only): 700394737
The MM710 T1/E1 Media Module offers the combined features of a DEFINITY DS1 circuit pack and includes the following:

A built-in CSU AMI-BASIC Both A-law for E1 and -law for T1 Line Coding: AMI, ZCS, B8ZS for T1 and HDB3 or AMI for E1 Stratum 3 Clock compatibility Trunk signaling for supporting US and International CO trunks and tie trunks as currently in existence
The MM710 T1/E1 Media Module supports the universal DS1 conforming to 1.544 Mbps T1 standard and 2.048 Mbps E1 standard ISDN PRI is also supported for T1 or E1 revenue-associated option. The MM710 is RoHS compliant.
DEF DS1 LOOPBACK JACK 700A Provides the ability to remotely troubleshoot the MM 710 T1/E1 Media Module. It is required for any customer with a maintenance contract and highly recommended for any other customer. Material Code: 700406101 Apparatus Code: None Required for any customer with a maintenance contract and an MM710 T1/E1 Media Module. Highly recommended for other customers to avoid expensive technician visits.
1 of 4
Table 35: Equipment List: Media Modules (continued) Media Modules MM711 Analog Media Module Comcode (for Services Ordering Only): 700394661
The MM711 Analog Media Module supports eight analog interfaces allowing the connectivity of Loop Start, Ground Start, Analog DID trunks, and 2-wire analog Outgoing CAMA E911 trunks. The MM711 Analog Media Module also allows connectivity of analog, tip/ring devices such as single line telephones, modems or group 3 fax machines. Each port may be configured as either a trunk interface or a station interface. Also included is support for caller ID signaling, ring voltage generation for a variety of international frequencies and cadences, and administrable line termination styles. The MM711 is RoHS compliant.
MM714 Analog Media Module
Comcode (for Services Ordering Only): 700395221
The MM714 Analog Media Module supports four analog stations and four CO trunks. Analog DID trunk connections are to be associated with the ports labeled "Line" and not "Trunk". The MM714 is RoHS compliant.
MM712 DCP Media Module
The MM712 DCP Media Module allows connectivity of up to eight 2-wire DCP voice terminals. MM712 does not support 4-wire DCP telephones. Signal timing specifications for the MM712 support TDM Bus Timing in receive and transmit modes. The G450 Media Gateway supplies only +5 VDC and 48 VDC to the MM712 Media Module. Any other required voltages must be derived on the module. Loop range secondary protection is provided on the MM712. The MM712 is also self-protecting from an over current condition on a tip and ring interface. The MM712 is RoHS compliant.
MM716 24 port Analog Media Module
The MM716 provides 24 analog ports supporting telephones, modem, and fax. These ports can also be configured as DID trunks with either wink-start or immediate-start. The 24 ports are provided via a 25-pair RJ21X amphenol connector, which can be connected by an amphenol cable to a breakout box or punch down block. The MM716 is RoHS compliant.
2 of 4
301
Equipment List
Table 35: Equipment List: Media Modules (continued) Media Modules MM717 24 port DCP Media Module Comcode (for Services Ordering Only): 700394711
The MM717 DCP Medial Module supports 24 DCP stations. The MM717 uses a 25-pair amphenol connector on the media modules faceplate. The 24 DCP ports are intended for in-building use only. Phone lines connected to those ports are not to be routed out-of-building. Failure to comply with this restriction could cause harm to personnel or equipment. The MM717 is RoHS compliant.
MM720 BRI Media Module
The MM720 BRI Media Module contains eight ports that can be administered either as BRI trunk connections or BRI endpoint (telephone and data module) connections. Information is communicated in two ways: Over two 64 Kbps channels called B1 and B2 that can be circuit-switched simultaneously Over a 16 Kbps channel called the D channel that is used for signaling. The D channel occupies one time slot for all eight D channels The circuit switched connections have a u-law or A-law option for voice operation. The circuit switched connections operate as 64 Kbps clear channels when in the data mode. The MM720 BRI Media Module does not support combining both B channels together to form a 128 Kbps channel. Note: The MM720 BRI Media Module cannot be administered to support both BRI trunks and BRI endpoints at the same time.
Note:
For BRI trunking, the MM720 BRI Media Module supports up to eight BRI interfaces, or up to 16 trunk ports, to the central office at the ISDN S/T reference point. For BRI endpoints, each of the eight ports on the MM720 BRI Media Module can support one integrated voice/data endpoint or up to two BRI stations and/or data modules. Supported endpoints must conform to AT&T BRI, World Class BRI, or National ISDN NI1/NI2 BRI standards. The MM720 BRI Media Module provides -40 volt phantom power to the BRI endpoints. The MM720 is RoHS compliant.
3 of 4
Table 35: Equipment List: Media Modules (continued) Media Modules MM722 2-port BRI Media Module Comcode (for Services Ordering Only): 700395239
The MM722 BRI Media Module supports two BRI ports. The MM722 is RoHS compliant.
MM340 Media Module
The MM340 Media Module supports one E1/T1 WAN port for connecting to a WAN endpoint device. The MM340 is RoHS compliant.
MM342 Media Module
The MM342 Media Module supports one USP WAN port for connecting to a WAN endpoint device. The MM342 is RoHS compliant.
4 of 4
303
Equipment List
Index
Index
Alarm configuring in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 OSS, configuring in IW. . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 SNMP, configuring in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Allocating media module slots . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Alternate Software Bank button . . . . . . . . . . 134 Amphenol cable, attaching to MM716 or MM717 . . . 55 Analog line circuit pack, TN2183 . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 port, connecting analog telephone to . . . . . . . 50 telephone port LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 telephone, connecting to analog port . . . . . . . 50 trunk connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Announcements, gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Approved grounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 ART (Automatic Registration Tool), running for RAS IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 ASB button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 ASG authentication enabling in GIW . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 72, 228 installing authentication file in GIW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Asynchronous TCP/IP links . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Attaching amphenol cable to MM716 or MM717 . . . . . . . 55 analog telephone to analog port . . . . . . . . . 50 analog trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 and enabling a modem gateway without S8300 . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 general description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 and enabling a USB modem gateway with S8300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Avaya Partner Contact Closure Adjunct . . . . . . 59 BRI stations to ISDN port . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 chassis to wall or rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 circuit protection devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Coupled Bonding Conductor (CBC) . . . . . . . . 58 data and voice devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 DCP telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 E1/T1 trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 WAN link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 endpoint devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Ethernet WAN link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Numerical
400B2 Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808A Emergency Transfer Panel, installing . 888B converter for multi-carrier cabinets . . . . . . . . . for single-carrier cabinets . . . . . . . . 909A universal coupler, DC version . . . . . 909A/B universal coupler . . . . . . . . . . connection to loudspeaker paging system DIP switch settings . . . . . . . . . . . 909B universal coupler AC version KS-22911L2 power supply . . . . . . .
. . . . 234 . . . . 60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . 279 . 280 . 280 . 285 . 280
. . . . 280
A
Access, RFA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessing Avaya Installation Wizard (IW) . . . . . . . Maintenance web pages . . . . . . . . . Accessories box, contents . . . . . . . . . . Adjunct IOLAN+, connecting to . . . . . . . . . . parameters, administering . . . . . . . . . power connections . . . . . . . . . . . . end-to-end . . . . . . . . . . . . . . sources of information . . . . . . . . . . Avaya Interactive Response systems . . Avaya Modular Messaging systems . . . Avaya SIP Enablement Services (SES) . Call Accounting Systems . . . . . . . . Call Management System . . . . . . . DEFINITY Wireless Business System . . . . . EC500 Extension to Cellular systems . . Intuity AUDIX Messaging systems . . . Off-PBX Station systems . . . . . . . . Administrator logins adding in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . configuring in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . After installation overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . testing connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LSP failover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . trunks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . 20 . . . 151 . . . 74 . . . 26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 . 262 . 234 . 235 . 286 . 287 . 287 . 287 . 288 . 286 . 288 . 287 . 287 . 287
. . . 152 . . . 152 . . . 83 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
83 84 83 83 83
305
Index
external router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 ground conductors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 IP telephone to gateway. . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 ISDN trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 modem to gateway without S8300 . . . . . . . . 63 safety ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 switch or network data port . . . . . . . . . . . 47 USB modem to gateway with S8300 . . . . . . . 78 USP WAN link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 WAN link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Attendant console auxiliary power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 distance limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 AUDIX IA770 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 coresidency, shared resources of . . . . . . . 237 installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 S8300 upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 LX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Authentication CHAP, enabling in GIW . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 file for CM installing in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 obtaining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 for gateway installing in GIW . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 installing in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 obtaining gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Automatic Registration Tool see ART Auxiliary power for attendant console . . . . . . . . 235 Avaya Communication Manager (CM) software unpacking in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 upgrading in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103, 161 overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 via S8300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 with CD-ROM drive . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 without CD-ROM drive . . . . . . . . . . 100 upload source, selecting . . . . . . . . . . . 162 version requirements for LSP . . . . . . . . . . 21 Avaya EC500 Extension to Cellular systems, sources of information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Avaya Ethernet switch, external . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Avaya Gateway Manager, upgrading Java applet via FTP/ TFTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Avaya Installation Wizard (IW) accessing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 accessing, configuring laptop for . . . . . . . . . 151 administrator logins adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 alarms, configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 authentication file, installing . . . . . . . . . . 181 call routing, configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 CM authentication file, installing . . . . . . . . . 202 license file, installing . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 software unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 upgrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103, 161 upload source, selecting . . . . . . . . . 162 configuration, initial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 country, selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 date/time information, configuring . . . . . . . 159 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Domain Name Server (DNS), configuring . . . . 168 Electronic Preinstallation Worksheet, importing . 155 endpoints, installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 extension ranges, adding . . . . . . . . . . . 189 firmware upgrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 uploading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 gateway configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 firmware, upgrading . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 installation, verifying . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Gateway Device Manager, launching . . . . . . 206 INADS, configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 installation log file, saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 new, confirming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 IP addresses, configuring . . . . . . . . . . . 173 IP phone upgrade files, uploading . . . . . . . 182 laptop, configuring to access . . . . . . . . . . 151 license file, installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 master key, changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Media Gateway Controller (MGC) configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 and upgrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 upgrading existing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 modem configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 enabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 status, displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 name and number list, importing . . . . . . . . 190 Network Time Protocol (NTP), configuring . . . 169 new installation, confirming . . . . . . . . . . 158 NVRAM factory defaults, restoring . . . . . . . 159 optional item checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 optional services, configuring . . . . . . . . . . 167 OSS alarm, configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 phone message files, installing . . . . . . . . . 165 primary controller IP addresses, configuring . . . 166 Primary Management Interface (PMI), configuring 174
Index
product ID, changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 required item checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 root password, changing . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 running. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 S8300 Server IP addresses, configuring . . . . . 166 Server IP addresses, configuring . . . . . . . . 166 SNMP alarm, configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 V1 community strings, configuring . . . . . . 175 V3 user, configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 system data, viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 telephony parameters, configuring . . . . . . . . . . . 186 translation defaults, configuring . . . . . . . . 187 translation information, generating . . . . . . . . 170 trunk adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 list of, viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 media module, configuring . . . . . . . . . . 197 modifying IP route configuration . . . . . . . . . . . 194 parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 status, displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 UPS, configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 usage options, selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Avaya Interactive Response systems, information on . 287 Avaya Modular Messaging systems, information on . 287 Avaya Navy Shipboard Services . . . . . . . . . . 29 Avaya Off-PBX Station systems, information on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Avaya Partner Contact Closure Adjunct . . . . . . . 59 Avaya SIP Enablement Services (SES), sources of information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Avaya Software Update Manager . . . . . . . . . . 101
with cable guides . . . . . . . without cable guides . . . . . for wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . attaching to gateway . . . . . BRI stations, connecting to ISDN port Busy tone disconnect equipment . . Buttons ASB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RST . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . .
30 30 32 32 49 280
. . . . . . . 134 . . . . . . . 134
C
Cabinets multi-carrier, converter for CCSC-1 PRI-to-DASS . . . . . . . . . . CCSC-2 PRI-to-DPNSS . . . . . . . . . PRI-to-BRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . single-carrier, converter for CCSC-1 PRI-to-DASS . . . . . . . . . . CCSC-2 PRI-to-DPNSS . . . . . . . . . PRI-to-BRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable guides on mounting bracket . . . . . . . . Call Accounting Systems, sources of information . Call center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . gateway announcements . . . . . . . . . . Call Detail Recording (CDR) data collection, administering. . . . . . . . . equipment, connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . parameters, administering . . . . . . . . . . switch-to-adjunct link, testing . . . . . . . . . Call Management System, sources of information Call routing, configuring in IW . . . . . . . . . . Calling queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CBC (Coupled Bonding Conductor) . . . . . . . installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CCA port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CCSC-1 PRI-to-DASS converter for multi-carrier cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . for single-carrier cabinets . . . . . . . . . . CCSC-2 PRI-to-DPNSS converter for multi-carrier cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . for single-carrier cabinets . . . . . . . . . . CDR see Call Detail Recording (CDR) CD-ROM drive, upgrading software . . . . . . . CHAP authentication enabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . enabling in GIW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chassis dimensions and weight . . . . . . . . . . . front panel description . . . . . . . . . . . . installation see Gateway chassis installation Checking available number of power outlets . . . . . .
. 279 . 279 . 279 . 279 . 279 . 279 29, 30 . 288 . 239 . 239 . . . . . . . . . .
258 258 259 260 286 188 285 . 58 . 59 133
B
Backing up the gateway to USB mass storage device 123 Before installation environmental verification . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 grounding verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 power verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 read planning documentation . . . . . . . . . . 19 required equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 site requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Boot banks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Box inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Brackets, mounting for rack attaching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 checks before . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 types of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
. 279 . 279 . 279 . 279

79, 99 67, 72 . 228
. 149 . 131
. . 25
307
Index
environment before installing . . . . . . for DC in loopback jack . . . . . . . . . grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . integrity of local equipment on DS1 span . list of optional and required items in IW . . Circuit packs TN2183 analog line . . . . . . . . . . . TNPRI/BRI converter for multi-carrier cabinets . . . . . . . for single-carrier cabinets . . . . . . Circuit protection, installing . . . . . . . . . C-LAN board, administering IP addresses of . Clearance, front and rear . . . . . . . . . . CLI commands for upgrading firmware via a USB device . . . . . . . . . . via FTP/TFTP . . . . . . . . . . . . description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . upgrading gateway firmware via FTP/TFTP . . . . . . . . . . . . via USB device . . . . . . . . . . . CM authentication file downloading to laptop . . . . . . . . installing in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . license file downloading to laptop . . . . . . . . installing in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . software unpacking in IW . . . . . . . . . . . upgrading overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . via S8300 . . . . . . . . . . . . with CD-ROM drive . . . . . . . . without CD-ROM drive . . . . . . upgrading in IW . . . . . . . . . . . upload source, selecting . . . . . . . software, upgrading in IW . . . . . . . . Coaxial converter, 888B for multi-carrier cabinets . . . . . . . . . for single-carrier cabinets . . . . . . . . COM port, selecting in GIW . . . . . . . . . Combination limitations for media modules . Command Line Interface see CLI Commands copy ftp EW_archive . . . . . . . . . . copy ftp module . . . . . . . . . . . . copy ftp phone-image . . . . . . . . . . copy ftp phone-script . . . . . . . . . . copy ftp SW_imageA . . . . . . . . . . copy ftp SW_imageB . . . . . . . . . . copy running-config startup-config . . . . copy scp phone-script . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. 24 . 277 . 25 . 265 . 158
. . . . 285 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . 279 . 56 . 256 . 149 . 111 . 104 . 81 . 127
. . . . 104 . . . . 111 . . . . 21 . . . . 202 . . . . 21 . . . . 171 . . . . 164 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 . 99 . 99 . 100 . 161 . 162 . 103 . 279 . 279 . 210 . 35
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. 104 . 104 . 116 . 116 . 104 . 104 . 115 . 116
copy tftp EW_archive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 copy tftp module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 copy tftp phone-image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 copy tftp phone-script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 copy tftp SW_imageA . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 copy tftp SW_imageB . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 copy usb EW_archive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 copy usb module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 copy usb phone-image. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 copy usb phone-script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 copy usb SW_imageA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 copy usb SW_imageB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 erase phone-image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 ip tftp-server file-system size . . . . . . . . . . . 115 reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 save translation lsp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 show application-memory . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 show controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 show interfaces serial . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Computer connecting to the gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 downloading gateway firmware to local . . . . . . 112 HyperTerminal, setting up on . . . . . . . . . . 249 laptop, configuring for IW access . . . . . . . . 151 testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Conditions good for installation . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Configuration Avaya Communication Manager software via S8300 Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 DS1 loopback jack checking for DC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 using fiber multiplexers . . . . . . . . . . . 276 files upgrading IP phone, overview . . . . . . . . . 113 gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 basic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 initial in GIW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 initial in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 LAN device on gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 software, recording information for . . . . . . 88 laptop, for accessing IW . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 limitations of media modules . . . . . . . . . . . 35 modem in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Multi-Tech hardware required for . . . . . . . . . . 278 MT5634ZBA-USB-V92 . . . . . . . . . 279 NTP in IW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 remote, via Telnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 telephone software, recording information for . . . 89 trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 trunk software, recording information for . . . . . 91 WAN line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Index
software, recording information for . Connecting analog telephone to analog port . . . . analog trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . and enabling a modem gateway without S8300 . . . . . . general description . . . . . . . . serial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . USB gateway with S8300 . . . . . . gateway without S8300 . . . . . Avaya Partner Contact Closure Adjunct BRI stations to ISDN port . . . . . . . Call Detail Recording (CDR) equipment circuit protection devices . . . . . . . computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . computer to Services port . . . . . . . Coupled Bonding Conductor (CBC) . . data and voice devices . . . . . . . . DCP telephones . . . . . . . . . . . E1/T1 trunk. . . . . . . . . . . . . . E1/T1 WAN link . . . . . . . . . . . endpoint devices . . . . . . . . . . . Ethernet WAN link . . . . . . . . . . external router . . . . . . . . . . . . IOLAN+ 104 terminal server . . . . . . IOLAN+ 104 to adjunct and LAN . . . . IP telephone to gateway. . . . . . . . ISDN trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . modem after running GIW . . . . . . . music source registered to gateway via KS-23395-L4 . . unregistered to gateway via KS-23395-L3 . . to gateway via KS-23395-L4 . . over-voltage protection devices . . . . power to the gateway . . . . . . . . . printer to gateway via TCP/IP . . . . . safety ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . serial modem in GIW . . . . . . . . . server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Services port to computer . . . . . . . sneak-current protection devices. . . . switch or network data port . . . . . . telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . USB modem gateway with S8300 . . . . . . . . in GIW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . USP WAN link . . . . . . . . . . . . WAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connections adjunct power . . . . . . . . . . . . end-to-end . . . . . . . . . . . . IOLAN+ 104 terminal server cabling . .
. . . . . 92 . . . . . 50 . . . . . 53 . . . . . 63 . . . . . 63 . . . . . 63 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 . 68 . 59 . 49 . 258 . 56 . 47 . 48 . 58 . 47 . 52 . 54 . 58 . 47 . 58 . 58 . 249 . 247 . 49 . 54 . 230
. . . . . 284 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 . 283 . 56 . 44 . 262 . 43 . 230 . 48 . 48 . 56 . 47 . 89 . 90 . 78 . 231 . 57 . 57
. . . . . 234 . . . . . 235 . . . . . 247
music-on-hold FCC-registered equipment . . . . . . . . . non-FCC-registered equipment . . . . . . . Connectivity IOLAN+ 104, testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LAN device, testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . testing after installation . . . . . . . . . . . . Console (CON) port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contact closure implementing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . port description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contents of gateway package . . . . . . . . . . . Converter for multi-carrier cabinets CCSC-1 PRI-to-DASS . . . . . . . . . . . CCSC-2 PRI-to-DPNSS . . . . . . . . . . for single-carrier cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . CCSC-1 PRI-to-DASS . . . . . . . . . . . CCSC-2 PRI-to-DPNSS . . . . . . . . . . TNPRI/BRI for multi-carrier cabinets . . . . . . . . . . for single-carrier cabinets . . . . . . . . . . copy ftp EW_archive CLI command . . . . . . . . copy ftp module CLI command . . . . . . . . . . copy ftp phone-image CLI command . . . . . . . . copy ftp phone-script CLI command . . . . . . . . copy ftp SW_imageA CLI command . . . . . . . . copy ftp SW_imageB CLI command . . . . . . . . copy running-config startup-config CLI command . . copy scp phone-script CLI command. . . . . . . . copy tftp EW_archive CLI command . . . . . . . . copy tftp module CLI command . . . . . . . . . . copy tftp phone-image CLI command . . . . . . . copy tftp phone-script CLI command . . . . . . . . copy tftp SW_imageA CLI command . . . . . . . . copy tftp SW_imageB CLI command . . . . . . . . copy usb EW_archive CLI command . . . . . . . . copy usb module CLI command . . . . . . . . . . copy usb phone-image CLI command . . . . . . . copy usb phone-script CLI command . . . . . . . copy usb SW_imageA CLI command . . . . . . . copy usb SW_imageB CLI command . . . . . . . Country, selecting in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coupled Bonding Conductor see CBC Coupler KS-23395-L3 connecting unregistered music source to gateway . . KS-23395-L4 connecting registered music source to gateway via . . unregistered music source to gateway via universal 909A, DC version . . . . . . . . . . . . .
281 281 255
. 88 . 83
132 133
. 59
133
. 26
279 279 279 279 279 279 279 104 104 . 116 . 116 104 104 . 115 . 116 105 105 . 116 . 116 105 105 . 111 . 111 . 116 . 116 . 111 . 111 187
282
284 283 280
309
Index
909A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DIP switch settings . . . . . . . . . . jumper pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . 909B AC version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC version, KS-22911L2 power supply loudspeaker paging with . . . . . . . . . CWY1 board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . 280 . . 280 . . 280 . . . . . 280 . 280 . 285 . 238
D
Date/time information, configuring in IW . . . . . . . 159 DCP media modules, ports for in-building use only . . . 57 telephone, connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 DEFINITY Wireless Business System sources of information . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Device Manager, upgrading Java applet via a USB device 111 Devices connecting endpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 data and voice, connecting . . . . . . . . . . . 47 new, replacing and adding. . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Dimensions of plywood board for mounting gateway . 19 DIP switch settings for 909A/B universal coupler . . . 280 DNS, configuring in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Documentation, planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Domain Name Server see DNS Downloading CM authentication file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 license file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 gateway authentication file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 firmware to local PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 firmware to local TFTP sever . . . . . . . . . 108 license file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 IP telephone configuration files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 latest version of guide from website . . . . . . . 13 recent firmware updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 upgrade software from CD-ROM . . . . . . . . 79, 99 DS1 loopback jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 checking local equipment integrity . . . . . . 265 configuration checking for DC . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 using fiber multiplexers . . . . . . . . . . 276 installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 selecting method . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 with smart jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 without smart jack . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
testing data integrity . . . . . . . . . . . from ISCU . . . . . . . . . . . . from smart jack . . . . . . . . . . to smart jack . . . . . . . . . . . with smart jack . . . . . . . . . . without smart jack . . . . . . . . . span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . checking integrity of local equipment on T1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTE V.35 serial cable . . . . . . . . . . . . X.21 serial cable . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
267 265 270 270 265 274 264 265 263
. . . . 57 . . . . 57
E
E1 trunk, connecting . . . . . . . . . . . E1/T1 port, on MM340 media module . . . . . WAN link, connecting . . . . . . . . . ECC see External Communications Controller Electronic Preinstallation Worksheet (EPW) importing in GIW . . . . . . . . . . . importing in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . obtaining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enabling ASG authentication in GIW . . . . . . . CHAP authentication . . . . . . . . . modem gateway without S8300 . . . . . . . general description . . . . . . . . . in GIW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . serial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . USB gateway with S8300 . . . . . . . gateway without S8300 . . . . . Endpoint devices connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . new, replacing and adding . . . . . . . Endpoints installing in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . Multimedia Call Handling (MMCH) . . . administering . . . . . . . . . . . one-number complex . . . . . . connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . wideband non-signaling . . . . . . . . . . . overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . remote port module. . . . . . . . . signaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Environmental conditions
. . . . . 54 . . . . . 58 . . . . . 58
. . . . 212 . . . . 155 . . . . . 24 . 67, 72, 228 . 67, 72, 228 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 . 63

226 184 . 63
. . . . . 78 . . . . . 68 . . . . . 47 . . . . . 87 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
197 262 262 262 262 262 262 262 262 262 262
Index
mounting solution for harsh . . . . . . . . . . . 29 verifying for installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 EPW see Electronic Preinstallation Worksheet (EPW) Equipment busy tone disconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 Call Detail Recording (CDR), connecting . . . . . 258 music-on-hold FCC-registered connections . . . . . . . . . 281 non-FCC-registered connections . . . . . . . 281 paging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 loudspeaker for MCC1, SCC1, CMC1, G600, or G650 media gateways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 hooking up from gateway . . . . . . . . . 285 with universal coupler . . . . . . . . . . . 285 without paging adapter . . . . . . . . . . 285 without universal coupler . . . . . . . . . 285 required for installation gathering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 IOLAN+ 104 terminal server . . . . . . . . . 246 removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 erase phone-image CLI command . . . . . . . . . 116 ETH LAN port connecting computer to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 external router to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 server to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 for network switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 ETH WAN port connecting computer to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Ethernet WAN link to. . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 external router to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 server to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Ethernet switch, external Avaya . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 WAN link, connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 ETR port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 European Standard Paging Access (ESPA) radio paging equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Expansion Services Module (ESM) . . . . . . . . . 262 administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Extension ranges, adding in IW . . . . . . . . . . . 189 External Avaya Ethernet switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Communications Controller (ECC) . . . . . . . . 281 endpoint devices, connecting . . . . . . . . . . 47 Multi-Tech modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 administering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
hardware to configure . . . . . . MT5634ZBA-USB-V92 . . . . . . MT5634ZBA-USB-V92, configuring MT5634ZBA-V92-GLOBAL . . . . ringing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . router, connecting to gateway . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
278 278 279 279 285 . 58
F
Fan tray, replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fastening chassis to wall or rack . . . . . . . . . Feet, affixing to stand gateway on table . . . . . . Fiber multiplexers configuring DS1 loopback . . . . . . . . . . . Field replaceable units adding and removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . fan tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . gateway main board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . memory modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP20 modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP80 modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VoIP modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Firmware banks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . copying files to S8300 Server . . . . . . . . . default bank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . downloading recent updates . . . . . . . . . . files upgrading IP phone . . . . . . . . . . . . installing from TFTP server on the S8300 Server loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . upgrading example using FTP/TFTP . . . . . . . . . . gateway CLI commands for, via FTP/TFTP . . . . downloading to local PC . . . . . . . . . downloading to local TFTP server . . . . from primary controller . . . . . . . . . in GIW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . using CLI via FTP/TFTP . . . . . . . . . using CLI via USB device . . . . . . . . in GIW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . installation worksheets, preparing . . . . . . Server Values worksheets, preparing . . . . with Avaya Software Update Manager . . . . uploading in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front panel gateway buttons ASB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. 96 . 29 . 33
276
. . . . . . . .
93 96 93 94 94 94 97 94
134
. 110
134
. 24 . 113
109 134 105 104
. 112
108 102 102 103 101 104 . 111 219 177 105 106 101 178
134 134
311
Index
description . . . . . media module slots . overview . . . . . . ports analog telephone . CCA . . . . . . . Console (CON) . . ETH WAN . . . . ETR . . . . . . . line . . . . . . . router . . . . . . Services . . . . . trunk . . . . . . . USB . . . . . . . system LEDs . . . . media modules MM312 LEDs . . . . . . overview . . . . . ports . . . . . . . MM314 LEDs . . . . . . overview . . . . . ports . . . . . . . MM316 LEDs . . . . . . overview . . . . . ports . . . . . . . MM340 LEDs . . . . . . overview . . . . . ports . . . . . . . MM342 LEDs . . . . . . overview . . . . . ports . . . . . . . MM710 LEDs . . . . . . overview . . . . . ports . . . . . . . MM711 LEDs . . . . . . overview . . . . . ports . . . . . . . MM712 LEDs . . . . . . overview . . . . . ports . . . . . . . MM714 LEDs . . . . . . overview . . . . . ports . . . . . . . MM716 LEDs . . . . . . overview . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . 131 . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 . 133 . 132 . 133 . 133 . 132 . 133 . 132 . 132 . 132 . 132
ports . . MM717 LEDs . . overview ports . . MM720 LEDs . . overview ports . . MM722 LEDs . . overview ports . . S8300 Server overview . . ports . . . LEDs . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
. . . . . . . . . . . . 135 . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
G
Gateway authentication file, downloading to laptop . . . . backing up to USB mass storage device . . . . call center. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . announcements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . channels, number of supported . . . . . . . . . components, initializing in GIW . . . . . . . . . configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . initial gateway in GIW . . . . . . . . . . . initial in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . configuring in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . connecting computer to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . power to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . printers via TCP/IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . firmware banks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . downloading files to local PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . to local TFTP server . . . . . . . . . . . installing from TFTP server on S8300 Server. upgrading CLI commands for, via FTP/TFTP . . . . CLI commands for, via USB device . . . . from primary controller . . . . . . . . . in GIW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . using CLI via FTP/TFTP . . . . . . . . . using CLI via USB device . . . . . . . . with Avaya Software Update Manager . . front panel buttons ASB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. 21
123 239 239 . 94 212 . 81 209 151 173
. 47 . 44
262 134
. 112
108 109 104
. 111
102 102 103 101 104 . 111 101
134 134
Index
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . media module slots . . . . . . . . . . ports analog telephone . . . . . . . . . . CCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Console (CON) . . . . . . . . . . . ETH WAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . ETR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . system LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . ground block for multiple . . . . . . . . . installation chassis media modules, before inserting . . . mounting options . . . . . . . . . . overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rack mounting . . . . . . . . . . . tabletop installation . . . . . . . . . wall mounting . . . . . . . . . . . equipment required . . . . . . . . . . non-S8300, prerequisites for . . . . . . S8300 Server, prerequisites for . . . . . session, initializing in GIW . . . . . . . verifying in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . IOLAN+ 104 terminal server, administering . LAN device adding to. . . . . . . . . . . . . . configuring on . . . . . . . . . . . modules, adding to . . . . . . . . . . license file downloading to laptop . . . . . . . . . required for VPN . . . . . . . . . . . loudspeaker paging, hooking up from . . . main board inserting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . on-board modules adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . removing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mounting hardware required . . . . . . . . music source registered connecting to via KS-23395-L4 . . . installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . unregistered connecting to via KS-23395-L3 . . . connecting to via KS-23395-L4 . . . installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . package, contents of . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . 131 . . . 131 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 . 133 . 132 . 133 . 133 . 132 . 133 . 132 . 132 . 132 . 132 . 41
. . 34 . . 29 . . 29 . . 29 . . 33 . 32, 33 . . 19 . . 20 . . 20 . . 212 . . 205 . . 253
. . . 88 . . . 88 . . . 87 . . . 21 . . . 21 . . . 285 . . . 93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
93 93 93 93 19
. . . 284 . . . 284 . . . . . . . . . 282 . 283 . 281 . 26
prerequisites for installing S8300 Server in . . . . 20 replicating to USB mass storage device . . . . . 123 restoring from USB mass storage device . . . . 123 serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 specifications, technical . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 supported modems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 telephone adding to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 configuring on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 trunk adding to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 configuring on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 USB mass storage device backing up to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 replicating to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 restoring from . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 voice modules, adding to. . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 WAN line, configuring on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 modules, adding to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Gateway Device Manager, launching in IW . . . . . 206 Gateway Installation Wizard (GIW) ASG authentication, enabling . . . . . . 67, 72, 228 authentication file, installing . . . . . . . . . . 222 basic configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 CHAP authentication, enabling . . . . . . . . . 228 COM port, selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 configuration, initial gateway . . . . . . . . . . 209 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Electronic PreInstallation Worksheet, importing . 212 firmware, upgrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 gateway components, initializing . . . . . . . . . . . 212 firmware, upgrading . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 installation session, initializing . . . . . . . . 212 installation log file, saving . . . . . . . . . . . 230 IP addresses, configuring . . . . . . . . . . . 214 IP phone upgrade files, uploading . . . . . . . 224 license file, installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 master key, changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Media Gateway Controller (MGC), configuring . . 218 modem connecting after running GIW . . . . . . . . 230 enabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 serial connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 enabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 testing after running GIW . . . . . . . . . . 231 USB connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 enabling (gateway with S8300). . . . . . . 78 enabling (gateway without S8300) . . . . . 68
313
Index
Primary Management Interface (PMI), configuring 215 RAS IP address, entering . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 root password, changing . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 running. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 SNMP V1 community strings, configuring . . . . . . 216 V3 user, configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 usage options, selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Gigabit Ethernet port, for network switching . . . . . 47 Ground block for multiple gateways . . . . . . . . . 41 Ground conductors, attaching . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 general requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 safety ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Grounding approved . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Supplementary Ground Conductor . . . . . . . . 41 verifying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 wires, attaching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Guide downloading latest version from website . . . . . 13 related resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 safety labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 security alert labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 sending comments about . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 typographical conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Guides for cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29, 30
H
Help resources for technical assistance technical assistance international . . . . . . . . . within the US . . . . . . . . Hot-inserting WAN and LAN modules Hot-swapping media modules . . . HyperTerminal, setting up . . . . .
. . . . . . . . 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 . 16 . 87 . 87 . 249
I
ICC see Internal Communications Controller ICC- VLAN configuring using CLI . . . . . . . . . ICSU see Integrated Channel Service Unit Import name and number list in IW . . . . INADS address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . configuring in IW . . . . . . . . . . . Inserting
. . . . . 292 . . . . . 190 . . . . . 22 . . . . . 170
media modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 S8300 Server module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Installation 808A Emergency Transfer Panel . . . . . . . . . 60 after . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 AUDIX IA770 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Avaya Partner Contact Closure Adjunct . . . . . . 59 before you start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 CBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 conditions good for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 contact closure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 DS1 loopback jack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 selecting method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 with smart jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 without smart jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 equipment, removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Expansion Services Module (ESM) . . . . . . . 262 firmware from TFTP server on the S8300 Server 109 gateway, verifying in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 IOLAN+ 104 terminal server, equipment required 246 log file saving in GIW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 saving in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 music source non-registered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 registered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 on gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 unregistered on gateway . . . . . . . . . . 281 new, confirming in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 required equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 testing connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 LSP failover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 trunks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 worksheets, preparing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Installing the gateway chassis see Gateway chassis installation Integrated Channel Service Unit (ICSU) . . . . 263, 281 testing DS1 span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Internal Communications Controller (ICC) . . . . . 281 Intuity AUDIX hunt group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 IA770 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 LX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 messaging system, sources of informations . . . 287 trunk group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Inventory of packed items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 IOLAN+ 104 terminal server . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 administering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 first time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 cabling connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Index
to adjunct and LAN . . . . . . . . connectivity, testing . . . . . . . . . . distance from switch to LAN hub . . . . HyperTerminal, setting up . . . . . . . installation and administration . . . . . navigating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rebooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . IP address configuring in GIW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . of C-LAN board, administering . . . . . RAS, obtaining . . . . . . . . . . . . IP node names, administering . . . . . . IP services, administering . . . . . . . . IP telephones connecting to gateway . . . . . . . . not supported by local TFTP server . . supported by local TFTP server . . . . TFTP server upgrade example . . . . upgrade files downloading . . . . . . . . . . . uploading in GIW . . . . . . . . . uploading in IW . . . . . . . . . . upgrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . configuration files, overview . . . . considerations . . . . . . . . . . . examples of 4602 after file stored in NVRAM . 4602SW and 4602D . . . . . . firmware files, overview . . . . . . troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . ip tftp-server file-system size CLI command ISDN adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BRI stations, connecting . . . . . . . converters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . for multi-carrier cabinets . . . . . . PRI-to-DASS . . . . . . . . . . PRI-to-DPNSS . . . . . . . . . for single-carrier cabinets . . . . . PRI-to-DASS . . . . . . . . . . PRI-to-DPNSS . . . . . . . . . PRI-to-BRI for multi-carrier cabinets . . . . for single-carrier cabinets . . . . trunk, connecting . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. 247 . 255 . 247 . 249 . 246 . 252 . 252 . 256 . 214 . 173 . 256 . 22 . 256 . 256 . . . .
49 113 113 116
K
KS-22911L2 power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . KS-23395-L3 coupler connecting unregistered music source to gateway KS-23395-L4 coupler connecting registered music source to gateway via . . . unregistered music source to gateway via . . 280 282
284 283
L
Labels safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . security alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LAN devices adding and connecting . . . . . . . . . . . configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IOLAN+, connecting to . . . . . . . . . . . . . port connecting computer to . . . . . . . . . . . connecting IP phone to . . . . . . . . . . . connecting switch to . . . . . . . . . . . . software configuration, recording information for . switch, connecting to the gateway . . . . . . . TFTP server, setting up on . . . . . . . . . . . Laptop, configuring for IW access . . . . . . . . . LEDs analog telephone port . . . . . . . . . . . . . media modules MM312 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MM314 alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MM316 alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MM340 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MM342 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MM710 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MM711 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MM712 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MM714 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MM716 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MM717 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MM720 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MM722 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . power supply indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . S8300 Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . License file for CM
. 13 . 13 . 88 . 88 . 88
247
. 114 . 224 . 182 . 115 . 113 . 121 . 119 . 117 . 113 . 120 . 115 . 279 . 49 . 279 . 279 . 279 . 279 . 279 . 279 . 279
. . . . .
47 49 47 88 47 107 151 132 135 135 135
. . . . . 279 . . . . . 279 . . . . . 54
J
Jumper pinouts for 909A/B universal coupler . . . . 280
135 135 136 137 138 140 141 142 144 146 147 148 . 45 135 132
315
Index
installing in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 obtaining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 for gateway installing in GIW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 installing in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 obtaining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 required for LSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Lightning exposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Limitations attendant console distance . . . . . . . . . . . 236 IOLAN+ 104, distance from switch to LAN hub . . 247 media module combinations . . . . . . . . . . . 35 LINE port, connecting analog telephone to . . . . . . 50 Logins, administrator adding in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 configuring in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Loopback jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 checking local equipment integrity . . . . . . . . 265 configuration checking for DC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 using fiber multiplexers . . . . . . . . . . . 276 installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 selecting method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 with smart jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 without smart jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 testing data integrity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 DS1 span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 from smart jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 to smart jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 with smart jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 without smart jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 Loudspeaker paging equipment for MCC1, SCC1, CMC1, G600, or G650 media gateways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 hooking up from gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 with universal coupler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 without paging adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 without universal coupler . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 LSP Avaya Communication Manager version requirements21 failover testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 license file requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
M
Main board, gateway inserting . . . . . . . . . on-board modules adding . . . . . . . . removing . . . . . . . replacing . . . . . . . removing . . . . . . . . . Main distribution frame (MDF)
. . . . . . . . . . . 93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 . 93 . 93 . 93 . 285
Maintenance web pages, accessing Malicious call trace (MCT) . . . . . Master key changing in GIW . . . . . . . changing in IW . . . . . . . . Media Gateway Controller (MGC) configuring and upgrading in IW . . . . in GIW . . . . . . . . . . . in IW . . . . . . . . . . . existing, upgrading in IW . . . . Media Gateway installation before inserting media modules connecting endpoint devices . . . . . . power to . . . . . . . . . . ground conductors attaching . . . . . . . . . location . . . . . . . . . . installing chassis . . . . . . . . . . media modules . . . . . . . power supply unit . . . . . order of installation . . . . . . power supply unit, removing . . Restricted Access Location . . S8300 server module, inserting. safety ground, connecting . . . Media module slots . . . . . . . . Media modules before installing . . . . . . . . combination limitations of . . . firmware upgrading via FTP/TFTP . . upgrading via USB device . for indoor use only . . . . . . . gateway chassis, inserting into . hot-swapping . . . . . . . . . installing . . . . . . . . . . . LAN modules, adding . . . . . MM312 . . . . . . . . . . . . MM314 . . . . . . . . . . . . MM316 . . . . . . . . . . . . MM340 . . . . . . . . . . . . MM342 . . . . . . . . . . . . MM710 . . . . . . . . . . . . MM711 . . . . . . . . . . . . MM712 . . . . . . . . . . . . MM714 . . . . . . . . . . . . MM716 . . . . . . . . . . . . MM717 . . . . . . . . . . . . MM720 . . . . . . . . . . . . MM722 . . . . . . . . . . . . new, replacing and adding . . . S8300 . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . 74 . . . . . . . . 280 . . . . . . . . 220 . . . . . . . . 179 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

156 218 176 160
. . . . . . . . . 34 . . . . . . . . . 47 . . . . . . . . . 44 . . . . . . . . . 40 . . . . . . . . . 40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
29 34 33 29 27 41 37 43 131
. . . . . . . . . 34 . . . . . . . . . 35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 . . . 111 . . . 53 . . . 39 . . . 87 . . . 34 . . . 87 . . 135 . 47, 135 . 47, 135 . . 136 . . 137 . . 138 . . 139 . . 140 . . 141 . . 142 . . 144 . . 147 . . 148 . . . 87 . . 134
Index
slot allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 slots, permitted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 voice modules, adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 WAN modules, adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Memory modules adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Messaging IA770 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 LX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 MGC see Media Gateway Controller (MGC) MM312 DCP ports, connecting DCP phones to . . . . . . 52 media module description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 MM314 10/100 Ethernet port, connecting external router to 58 Gigabit Ethernet port connecting computer to . . . . . . . . . . . 47 connecting external router to . . . . . . . . . 58 connecting server to . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 media module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 LEDs alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 PoE ports connecting computers to . . . . . . . . . . . 47 connecting IP phones to . . . . . . . . . . . 48 connecting servers to . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 for network switching . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 MM316 10/100 Ethernet port, connecting external router to 58 Gigabit Ethernet port connecting computer to . . . . . . . . . . . 47 connecting external router to . . . . . . . . . 58 connecting server to . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 media module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 LEDs alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 PoE ports connecting computers to . . . . . . . . . . . 47 connecting IP phones to . . . . . . . . . . . 48 connecting servers to . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 for network switching . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 MM340 media module connecting to WAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 MM342 media module connecting to WAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 MM710 E1/T1 port, connecting E1/T1 trunk to. . . . . . . 54 media module circuit protection devices for outdoor endpoints . 56 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 MM711 analog port connecting analog telephone to . . . . . . . . 50 connecting analog trunk to . . . . . . . . . . 53 media module circuit protection devices for outdoor endpoints . 56 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 MM712 DCP ports connecting DCP phones to . . . . . . . . . . 52 for in-building use only . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 media module description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 MM714 analog trunk ports, connecting analog trunks to . . 53 LINE port, connecting analog telephone to . . . . 50 media module description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 MM716 analog port connecting analog telephone to . . . . . . . . 50 connecting analog trunk to . . . . . . . . . . 53 attaching amphenol cable to . . . . . . . . . . . 55 media module connecting to punch down block for RJ-45 or RJ-11 jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 MM717 attaching amphenol cable to . . . . . . . . . . . 55 DCP ports connecting DCP phones to . . . . . . . . . . 52 for in-building use only . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 media module
Is s u e 1 J an u ar y 2008
317
Index
connecting to punch down block for RJ-45 or RJ-11 jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 MM720 ISDN ports, connecting ISDN BRI trunks to . . . . 54 media module connecting ISDN BRI stations to . . . . . . . 49 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 MM722 ISDN ports, connecting ISDN BRI trunks to . . . . 54 media module description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Modem configuring in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 connecting after running GIW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 for remote access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 gateway without S8300 . . . . . . . . . . . 63 serial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 serial in GIW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 USB gateway with S8300 . . . . . . . . . . . 78 gateway without S8300 . . . . . . . . . . 68 USB in GIW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 dial backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 enabling for remote access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 gateway without S8300 . . . . . . . . . . . 63 in GIW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 serial in GIW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 USB in GIW gateway with S8300 . . . . . . . . . . . 78 gateway without S8300 . . . . . . . . . . 68 Multi-Tech . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 administering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 hardware to configure . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 MT5634ZBA-USB-V92 . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 MT5634ZBA-V92-GLOBAL. . . . . . . . . . 279 permanent connection for reporting alarms . . . . 63 settings, Configure Server Maintenance Web page 77 status, displaying in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 supported by gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 testing connection after running GIW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 gateway with S8300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 gateway without S8300 . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Mounting brackets
for wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . attaching to gateway . . . . . . . . gateway in 19-inch rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . in rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . on tabletop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . on wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . hardware required . . . . . . . . . . . . . options for chassis. . . . . . . . . . . . . mounting brackets for rack attaching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . checks before . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . types of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . with cable guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . without cable guides . . . . . . . . . . . . MP20 modules adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . channels, number of . . . . . . . . . . . . removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP80 modules adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . channels, number of . . . . . . . . . . . . removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-carrier cabinets, converter for . . . . . . CCSC-1 PRI-to-DASS . . . . . . . . . . . CCSC-2 PRI-to-DPNSS . . . . . . . . . . PRI-to-BRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multimedia endpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . administering . . . . . . . . . . . . . one-number complex . . . . . . . . connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . system administering . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multimedia Call Handling (MMCH) . . . . . . . administering endpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . one-number complex . . . . . . . . . . system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . connecting endpoints . . . . . . . . . . . Expansion Services Module (ESM) . . . . . Multiplexers, fiber configuring DS1 loopback using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Tech modem administering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MT5634ZBA-USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . MT5634ZBA-USB-V92. . . . . . . . . . . MT5634ZBA-V92-GLOBAL . . . . . . . . Music source non-registered, installing . . . . . . . . . . registered connecting to gateway via KS-23395-L4 .
. . . 32 . . . 32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 . . 32 . . 33 32, 33 . . 19 . . 29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31 31 29 30 30 94 94 94 94
94 94 94 94 279 279 279 279 262 262 262 262
. . 262 . . 262 . . . . . . . . . .
262 262 262 262 262
. . 276 . . 279 . . . 68 278, 279 . . 279 . . 281 . . 284
Index
installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . on gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . unregistered connecting to gateway via KS-23395-L3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . KS-23395-L4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . installing on gateway. . . . . . . . . . . Music-on-hold (MOH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . connecting FCC-registered equipment . . . . connecting non-FCC-registered equipment . . source non-registered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . registered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . connecting to gateway via KS-23395-L4 installing on gateway . . . . . . . . . unregistered connecting to gateway via KS-23395-L3 connecting to gateway via KS-23395-L4 installing on gateway . . . . . . . . . Mutual inductance coupling . . . . . . . . . . .
. . 281 . . 284 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 . 283 . 281 . 281 . 281 . 281 . 281 . 281 . 284 . 284 . 282 . 283 . 281 . 58
N
Name and number list, importing in IW . . . . Network data port, connecting to gateway. . . . . . interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LAN device, testing within and without . . . Network Time Protocol (NTP), configuring in IW Node names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NVRAM initializing with a jumper . . . . . . . . . . restoring factory defaults in IW . . . . . . .
. . . 190 . . . . . . . . . . . 47 . 265 . 88 . 169 . 256
. . . 127 . . . 159
O
Optional items in IW . . . . . . . . services, configuring in IW. Ordering analog trunk . . . . . . . trunk . . . . . . . . . . . WAN line . . . . . . . . . OSS alarm, configuring in IW . Outdoor installation . . . . . Out-of-building installation . . Over-voltage protection . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . 158 . . . . . . . . . . . 167 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 . 90 . 91 . 200 . 56 . 56 . 56
P
Package inventory . Paging equipment . ESPA radio. . . external ringing .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. 26 . 285 . 285 . 285
loudspeaker for MCC1, SCC1, CMC1, G600, or G650 media gateways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 hooking up from gateway . . . . . . . . . . 285 with universal coupler . . . . . . . . . . . 285 without paging adapter . . . . . . . . . . . 285 queue warning indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Parameters, administering adjunct . . . . . . . . . 262 Password RAS, obtaining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 root changing in GIW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 changing in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 PC connecting to the gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 downloading gateway firmware to local . . . . . . 112 Phone message files, installing in IW . . . . . . . 165 Physical description of gateway front panel . . . . . 131 Planning documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Platform, hardware, for harsh environment . . . . . . 29 Plugging in endpoint devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 the gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Plywood board dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 using to wall-mount gateway . . . . . . . . . . . 33 PoE ports connecting computers to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 IP phones to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 servers to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 for network switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Ports analog telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 CCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 COM, selecting in GIW . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 CON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 connecting data and voice devices to . . . . . . . . . . . 47 endpoint devices to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 contact closure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 ETH LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 ETH WAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 ETR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 IOLAN+ 104 terminal server administering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 connectivity testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 MM312 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 MM314 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 MM316 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 MM340 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 MM342 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 MM710 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
319
Index
MM711. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MM712. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MM714. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MM716. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MM717. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MM720. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MM722. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S8300 Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . switch or network data, connecting . . . . . . . trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning gateway in rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S8300 media module . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power attendant console auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . connection adjunct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . end-to-end . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . to gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cords obtaining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . local and phantom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . outlets, checking available number of . . . . . verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power supply KS-22911L2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . unit installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pre-installation activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preinstallation worksheet see Electronic Preinstallation Worksheet (EPW) Preparation installation worksheets . . . . . . . . . . . . Server Values worksheets . . . . . . . . . . . telephone configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . trunk configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WAN line configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . Primary controller configuring IP addresses in IW . . . . . . . . upgrading gateway firmware from . . . . . . . Primary Management Interface (PMI) configuring in GIW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . configuring in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . configuring using CLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . management functions . . . . . . . . . . . .
. 139 . 140 . 141 . 143 . 145 . 147 . 148 . 133 . 135 . 135 . 132 . 133 . 47 . 132 . 132 . 32 . 37 . 235 . 234 . 235 . 44 . 150 . 150 . 236 . 25 . 25 . 280 . . . . .
33 45 27 97 19
Printers adjunct parameters, administering connecting to gateway via TCP/IP PMS journal and PMS log . . . . system . . . . . . . . . . . . . switch-to-adjunct link, testing . Product ID, changing in IW . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
262 262 262 262 262 160
Q
Queue warning indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
R
Rack mounting brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 the gateway chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 RAS IP address entering in GIW . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 72 obtaining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 password, obtaining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 RDTT see Reliable Data Transport Tool (RDTT) Reliable Data Transport Tool (RDTT) administering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 downloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 package contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Reliable Session-Layer Protocol (RSP) tool . . . . 262 Remote access, enabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 configuration via Telnet . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Removing installation equipment . . . . . . . . . . 85 Replacing endpoint devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 fan tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 main board on-board module, gateway . . . . . . 93 main board, gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 memory module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 power supply unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 VoIP modules, MP20 and MP80 . . . . . . . . . 94 Replicating the gateway to USB mass storage device 123 Required equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 for installing IOLAN+ 104 terminal server . . 246 hardware for Multi-Tech modem . . . . . . . . 278 items in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Reset button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 reset CLI command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Restoring the gateway from USB mass storage device123 Restricted Access Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 RFA access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 RJ-45 splitter for connecting two BRI stations. . . . . 49
. 105 . 106 . 89 . 91 . 92 . 166 . 102 . 215 . 174 . 292 . 173
Index
Root password changing in GIW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 changing in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Router connecting external to gateway . . . . . . . . . 58 ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 RST button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Rubber feet, affixing to stand gateway on table . . . 33 Ruggedized mounting solution for harsh environment 29 Running Avaya Installation Wizard (IW) . . . . . . . . . . 153 Running Gateway Installation Wizard (GIW) . . . . . 209
S
S8300 Server Avaya Communication Manager software, upgrading via . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 call center solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 connecting to gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 connecting to USB modem . . . . . . . . . . 78 copying firmware to . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 gateway chassis, inserting into . . . . . . . . 37 installing firmware from the TFTP server on . . 109 IP addresses, configuring in IW . . . . . . . . 166 overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 ports description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 prerequisites for installing in gateway . . . . . 20 testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 software upgrading using IW or the Upgrade tool . . . . 100 upgrades for IA770 Intuity AUDIX . . . . . . . . 238 Safety ground, connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 save translation lsp CLI command . . . . . . . . . 84 Screws required for mounting gateway . . . . . . . 19 Securing amphenol cable to MM716 or MM717 . . . 55 Security alert labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Serial cable DTE V.35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 DTE X.21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 modem connecting and enabling . . . . . . . . . . . 63 connecting in GIW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Serial number of gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 viewing in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Server see S8300 Server Server IP addresses, configuring in IW . . . . . . . 166
Server Values worksheets, preparing . . . . Services optional, configuring in IW . . . . . . . . port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . connecting a computer to . . . . . . . show application-memory CLI command . . . show controllers CLI command . . . . . . . show interfaces serial CLI command . . . . . Single Sign-On (SSO) . . . . . . . . . . . Single-carrier cabinets, converter for CCSC-1 PRI-to-DASS . . . . . . . . . . CCSC-2 PRI-to-DPNSS . . . . . . . . . PRI-to-BRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Site conditions, checking before installation . . requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Smart jack installing DS1 loopback jack with . . . . . testing DS1 loopback jack with . . . . . . Sneak-current protection . . . . . . . . . . SNMP alarm, configuring in IW . . . . . . . . . V1 community strings, configuring in GIW . V1 community strings, configuring in IW . V3 user, configuring in GIW . . . . . . . V3 user, configuring in IW . . . . . . . . Software configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . recording LAN information for . . . . . recording telephone information for . . recording trunk information for . . . . recording WAN information for . . . . Reliable Data Transport Tool (RDTT) administering . . . . . . . . . . . . downloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . package contents . . . . . . . . . . upgrading Avaya CM via S8300 Server . . . . . overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . with CD-ROM drive . . . . . . . . . . without CD-ROM drive . . . . . . . . version, viewing in IW . . . . . . . . . . Software Update Manager . . . . . . . . . Specifications, technical. . . . . . . . . . . chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . power cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Supplementary Ground Conductor . . . . . . if ground block is used . . . . . . . . . . if ground block not used . . . . . . . . . Survivability by modem dial backup . . . . . Switch connecting to computer . . . . . . . . .
. . . 106 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
167 132 . 48 . 115 127 127 . 20
. . . 279 . . . 279 . . . 279 . . . . 24 . . . . 24 . . . 264 . . . 265 . . . . 56 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

201 216 175 217 175
. . . . .
81 88 89 91 92
262 261 261 261 261
. 99 . 99 . 99
100 155 101 149 149 149 150 . 41 . 43 . 44 . 63
. . . . 47
321
Index
connecting to gateway . . connecting to server . . . external Avaya Ethernet . . P130 . . . . . . . . . . . P130PWR . . . . . . . . P333PWR . . . . . . . . P333T . . . . . . . . . . port . . . . . . . . . . . testing . . . . . . . . . . Switch-to-adjunct link, testing CDR . . . . . . . . . . . printer . . . . . . . . . . System data, viewing in IW . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. 47 . 48 . 48 . 48 . 48 . 48 . 48 . 133 . 88
. . . . . . . . . . . 260 . . . . . . . . . . . 262 . . . . . . . . . . . 155
T
T1 DS1 span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . trunk, connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tabletop installation of the gateway chassis . . . . Task list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCP/IP connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . printers connecting to gateway via . . . . . . . . . settings for Maintenance web pages . . . . . . task list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical assistance international . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . within the US . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . chassis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . power cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Telephone adding to gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IP, connecting to gateway . . . . . . . . . . . software configuration, recording information for testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . after installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . troubleshooting one . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . several . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Telephony parameters, configuring in IW . . . . . . . . . translation defaults, configuring in IW . . . . . Telnet, remote configuration via . . . . . . . . . . Terminal server administering IP node names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IP services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IOLAN+ 104 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. 263 . 54 . 33 . 262 . 262 . 262 . 74 . 262 . 16 . 16 . 16 . 149 . 149 . 149 . 150 . . . . . . .

89 89 89 49 89 89 83
. 125 . 126 . 186 . 187 . 100 . 256 . 256 . 245
administering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . first time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cabling connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . to adjunct and LAN . . . . . . . . . . . connectivity, testing . . . . . . . . . . . . distance from switch to LAN hub . . . . . . HyperTerminal, setting up. . . . . . . . . . installation and administration . . . . . . . . navigating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rebooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminating telephones on the MM717 and MM716 . Testing computer type data device . . . . . . . . . . . DS1 loopback jack with smart jack . . . . . . . . loopback jack without smart jack . . . . . . span from ISCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . from smart jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . to smart jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Expansion Services Module (ESM) . . . . . . . installation connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LSP failover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . trunks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . integrity of data sent over loop . . . . . . . . . IOLAN+ 104 connectivity. . . . . . . . . . . . LAN device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . modem connection gateway with S8300 . . . . . . . . . . . . gateway without S8300 . . . . . . . . . . . server type data device . . . . . . . . . . . . switch type data device . . . . . . . . . . . . switch-to-adjunct link CDR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WAN link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TFTP server downloading gateway firmware to local . . . . . for upgrading IP phones . . . . . . . . . . . . installing firmware from, on the S8300 Server . . IP telephones not supported by local . . . . . . . . . . . supported by local . . . . . . . . . . . . . upgrade example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . setting up
248 249 253 253 247 249 247 255 247 249 246 252 252 256 245 . 55
. 88
265 274 265 270 270 262
. . . . .
83 84 83 83 83 267 255 . 88 79 73 88 88
. . . .
260 262 . 89 . 91 . 92 108
. 113
109
. 113 . 113 . 116
Index
on the LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . uploading IP phone upgrade files in GIW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TN2183 analog line circuit pack . . . . . . . . . . TNPRI/BRI converter for multi-carrier cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . for single-carrier cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Translations, generating information in IW . . . . . Troubleshooting CLI not accessible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Expansion Services Module (ESM) . . . . . . gateway has no power . . . . . . . . . . . . IOLAN+ 104 terminal server . . . . . . . . . . IP telephone upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . telephone one stops working . . . . . . . . . . . . . several stop working . . . . . . . . . . . . trunk stops working . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WAN line stops working . . . . . . . . . . . . Trunk adding in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . to gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . analog connecting to TRUNK port . . . . . . . . . ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . configuring in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . on gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . list of, viewing in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . media module, configuring in IW . . . . . . . . modifying in IW IP route configuration . . . . . . . . . . . parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . removing in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . software configuration, recording information for status, displaying in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . after installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRUNK port, connecting analog trunk to . . . . . .
. 107 . 107 . 224 . 182 . 285 . 279 . 279 . 16 . 170 . 127 . 262 . 126 . 256 . 120 . 125 . 125 . 126 . 126 . 127 . 192 . 90 . 53 . 90 . 190 . 91 . 90 . 191 . 197 . 194 . 193 . 90 . 196 . 91 . 195 . 91 . 83 . 126 . 53
U
Uniform Call Distribution/Direct Departmental Calling (UCD/ DDC) queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Uninterruptable Power Supply see UPS Universal coupler
909A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Upgrading Avaya Communication Manager software in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . firmware example using a USB device . . . . . . . . using FTP/TFTP . . . . . . . . . in GIW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . installation worksheets, preparing . . . Server Values worksheets, preparing . gateway firmware CLI commands for, via FTP/TFTP . . . downloading to local PC . . . . . . . . . . . . to local TFTP server . . . . . . . . from primary controller . . . . . . . . in GIW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . using CLI via USB device . . . . . . . . . . using CLI via FTP/TFTP . . . . . . . with Avaya Software Update Manager . IP telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . configuration files downloading . . . . . . . . . . . overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . examples of 4602 after file stored in NVRAM . . 4602SW and 4602D . . . . . . . . firmware files, overview . . . . . . . . troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . media modules and devices . . . . . . . software S8300, using IW or the Upgrade tool . with CD-ROM drive . . . . . . . . . . without CD-ROM drive . . . . . . . . Uploading firmware in IW . . . . . . . . . . UPS configuring in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Usage options selecting in GIW . . . . . . . . . . . . . selecting in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . USB mass storage device backing up the gateway. . . . . . . . CLI commands for upgrading firmware.
. . . 280 . . . . 27 . . . 103 . . . . 99 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

105 219 177 105 106
. . . 104 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
108 102 102 103 101
. 111
104 101 . 115
. . . . 114 . . . . 113 . . . 121 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 . 117 . 113

120
. 87
100
. 99
100 178 168 242 242 242
. . . . 211 . . . 157 . . . 123 . . . . 111
323
Index
example of upgrading firmware . . . . replicating the gateway . . . . . . . restoring the gateway . . . . . . . . upgrading gateway firmware using CLI modem connecting in GIW . . . . . . . . . . gateway with S8300 . . . . . . . gateway without S8300 . . . . . . enabling in GIW gateway with S8300 . . . . . . . gateway without S8300 . . . . . . supported by gateway . . . . . . . . port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . USP port, on MM342 media module . . . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. 111 . 123 . 123 . 111
Server Values, preparing. . . . . . . . . . . . 106
. . . . 231 . . . . 78 . . . . 68 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 . 68 . 68 . 132 . 57
V
Verifying environmental conditions before installation grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VoIP modules adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VPN license file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . 24 . . . 25 . . . 25 . . . . . . . . . . . .
94 94 94 21
W
Wall mounting brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 the gateway chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 33 WAN configuring on gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 E1/T1 port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 link connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 connecting to E1/T1 port . . . . . . . . . . . 58 connecting to USP port . . . . . . . . . . . 57 ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 preparing for configuration . . . . . . . . . . 92 testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 modules adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 hot-inserting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 software configuration, recording information for . 92 troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Wideband endpoints non-signaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 remote port module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 signaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Worksheets installation, preparing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

g450 Upgrade

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

g450 Upgrade

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Installing and Upgrading the Avaya G450 Media Gateway

03-602054 Issue 1 January 2008

About this book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 1: Before you install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 2: Installing the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . . . . . . . . . .

Issue 1 January 2008

Step 5: Connecting power to the G450 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PWR LED indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 3: Connecting devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway

Chapter 4: Connecting and enabling a modem for remote access . . .

Chapter 5: Configuring the G450 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 6: After installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Issue 1 January 2008

Chapter 7: Adding media modules and devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Adding an Avaya Partner Contact Closure Adjunct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 8: Upgrading and replacing Field Replaceable Units . . . . . .

6 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway

Chapter 9: Upgrading the Avaya Communication Manager software . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 10: Upgrading the G450 firmware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 11: Upgrading IP phone configuration and firmware files . . .

Issue 1 January 2008

Appendix A: Front panel description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway

Appendix B: Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix C: Running the Avaya Installation Wizard (Avaya IW) . . . . .

Issue 1 January 2008

194 195 196 197 197 198 202

Appendix D: Running the Gateway Installation Wizard (GIW) . . . . . .

Appendix E: Power supplies and adjunct systems . . . . . . . . . . . .

10 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway

External modems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hardware required when configuring modems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Issue 1 January 2008

Appendix F: Information Checklists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix G: Equipment List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway

About this book

Downloading this book and updates from the Web

Downloading this book

Safety labels and security alert labels

Issue 1 January 2008

About this book

14 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway

Issue 1 January 2008

About this book

16 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway

Email, send your comments to: document@avaya.com

Fax, send your comments to: 1-303-538-1741

Issue 1 January 2008

About this book

18 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway

Chapter 1: Before you install

Before going to site

Preparing required equipment

Equipment required for installation

Equipment required for mounting

Issue 1 January 2008

Before you install

Equipment required for installing an S8300 Server

Equipment required if you are not installing an S8300 Server

Obtaining the G450 serial number

Obtaining RFA access

20 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway

Before going to site

Downloading a G450 license file to your laptop